JP7164587B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed that has a plurality of termination conditions for the time-saving state (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-185193 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the game may be played while waiting for an advantageous small hit.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of ensuring the fairness of games by preventing players from waiting for an advantageous small win.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a small winning state after executing variable display on the first variable display means and the second variable display means,
In the small win state, the game medium enters the specific area, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
The game is better when controlled to the small winning state based on the variable display on the second variable display means than when controlled to the small winning state based on the variable display on the first variable display means. It is likely to be advantageous for those who
The small win state controlled based on the variable display on the second variable display means includes a first small win state and a second small win state more advantageous to the player than the first small win state. ,
variable means for changing from a closed state to an open state in which game media can enter more easily than in the closed state, based on the display result of the variable display of normal symbols reaching a predetermined result;
By entering the game medium into the variable means, the variable display of the second variable display means is executed,
can be controlled to a special state in which the variable means is more likely to be in the open state than in a normal state;
further comprising special state termination means capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times variable display is performed in the special state;
the normal state is more disadvantageous to the player than the special state;
After the special state ends, transition to the normal state,
The special state termination means is
updating the number of times of variable display by the second variable display means in the special state, and ending the special state when the number of times of variable display by the second variable display means in the special state reaches a first number; is possible and
The number of times of the small winning state based on the variable display on the second variable display means in the special state is updated, and the number of times of the small winning state based on the variable display on the first variable display means in the special state is not updated. , when the number of times of the small hit state based on the variable display on the second variable display means reaches a second number, it is possible to end the special state;
updating the total number of variable display times of the first variable display means and the second variable display means in the special state, and the total number of variable display times of the first variable display means and the second variable display means in the special state; is a third number of times greater than the first number of times, it is possible to end the special state,
When the first variable display of the special state is the variable display on the second variable display means, or when the first variable display of the special state is the variable display on the first variable display means. Even so, the light-emitting means provided in the variable means is caused to emit light during the variable display period (FIGS. 34-8, 34-11, 34-13, 36-1, etc.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control to the special state.

(2) In addition, in order to achieve the above object, another game machine according to the present invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 according to 73AK) that can perform variable display in the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 8a) and the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 8b) ) and
It is easier for the player to be more advantageous when the variable display is performed by the second variable display means than when the variable display is performed by the first variable display means (for example, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning device (e.g., a Variable winning ball device 15),
a pending storage means (e.g., a second pending storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to the variable display of the second variable display means as second pending information based on entry of a game medium into the variable winning device;
A special state control means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state, a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be in the open state than in a normal state;
a special state ending means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the processing of steps 73AKS013, 73AKS028, and 73AKS106) that ends the special state based on the number of times variable display is performed in the special state;
Said special state ending means, in the final variable display in said special state, on the condition that the number of said second pending information stored in said pending storage means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is the upper limit number) , the special state can be terminated (for example, the CPU 56 executing the processing of steps 73AKS012, step 73AKS013, step 73AKS105, and step 73AKS106).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second variable display means from executing the variable display more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and to secure the fairness of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The special state ending means, when the number of the second pending information stored in the pending storage means does not reach the predetermined number in the last variable display in the special state, The state may be ended (for example, the CPU 56 executing the processing of step 73AKS028 and step S149).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (2) above,
Flag management that turns on a first flag (for example, a time saving flag) when controlled to the special state, and turns off the first flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the final variable display in the special state. means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of steps 73AKS105 and 73AKS106),
The special state ending means may end the special state when the first flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second variable display means from executing the variable display more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and to secure the fairness of the game.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
When it is controlled to the small winning game state based on the variable display on the second variable display means than when it is controlled to the small winning game state based on the variable display on the first variable display means, It is likely to be advantageous for the player (for example, Figures 36-1 and 36-2),
The special state termination means is
The number of variable displays in the special state is counted, and when the number of variable displays in the special state reaches the first number, the special state can be terminated (for example, the processing of steps 73AKS007, step 73AKS028, and step S149). ) along with
The number of times of the small winning game state in the special state is counted, and when the number of times of the small winning game state in the special state becomes the second number, the special state can be ended (for example, the processing of step 73AKS025 ),
counting the number of times of variable display in the first variable display means and the second variable display means as the number of times of variable display in the special state (for example, executing the processing of step 73AKS002 and step S143);
As the number of times of the small winning game state in the special state, only the number of times of the small winning game state based on the variable display on the second variable display means is counted, and the small winning game state based on the variable display on the first variable display means is counted. The winning game state may not be counted (for example, the processing of steps 73AKS022 and 73AKS023 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control to the special state.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An external signal sending means (for example, CPU56 for executing the processing of S29) for sending a signal (for example, a signal during time saving) indicating that it is in the special state to the outside,
The external signal sending means may send a signal indicating the special state for a predetermined period even after the special state ends (for example, FIG. 36-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably recognize the continuation of the advantageous state by the external device.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration in the main board (game control board). FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a variation|variation in the 1st, 2nd special design in a 1st time saving state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control process processing. It is a display screen view of the effect display device showing the effect image of the round suggestive effect. It is a display screen view of the effect display device showing the effect image of the continuous holding notification effect. It is a timing chart of the continuous holding notification effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a data table used when selecting an effect mode of the round number suggesting effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a continuous holding notification effect presence/absence determination table; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a holding series/round number suggestion effect selection process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a round number suggestion production|presentation process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a first processing of consecutive holding notification effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second process of continuous holding notification effect; FIG. It is a display screen view of the effect display device showing the effect image of the specific effect. It is a timing chart of specific production. It is a flow chart which shows specific production 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows specific production 2nd processing. It is a display screen diagram of the production|presentation display apparatus which shows the 1st example of display control of the number of remaining time saving. It is a flow chart showing a process executed by the production control microcomputer in order to execute the production display of the remaining number of times of time saving shown in FIG. 33-1. It is a display screen diagram of the production|presentation display apparatus which shows the 2nd example of display control of the number of remaining time saving. It is a flow chart showing a process executed by the production control microcomputer in order to perform the production display of the remaining number of times of time saving shown in FIG. 33-3. It is an enlarged view of the display area in the vicinity of the time saving remaining number display unit showing an example of the remaining time saving number update lock display control. It is a display screen figure of the production|presentation display apparatus which shows the example of specific alerting|reporting. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration in the main board (game control board). It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of promotion alerting|reporting and arrival alerting|reporting. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the pending|holding number and an alerting|reporting mode. It is a figure which shows a timing chart during working hours reduction when there is no special 1 reservation. It is a figure which shows the aspects, such as a variable display device in the area A and B, and achievement production|presentation. It is a figure which shows a timing chart during working hours reduction when there is special 1 reservation. It is a diagram showing a timing chart during time reduction when not stopping the right reel. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a time saving 1st time change. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows time saving change processing. It is a figure which shows the hit classification table|surface of characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the hit probability of characteristic part 33AK, and a hit classification determination ratio. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of time saving final change. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing during fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of prize promotion information. It is a flow chart which shows time saving final fluctuation production processing. It is a timing chart in the time-saving final variation of the characteristic portion 33AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the hit classification table|surface of characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the hit probability of characteristic part 73AK, and a hit classification determination ratio. It is a timing chart showing the opening mode of the V winning area in the small hit of the characteristic portion 73AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of fluctuation of the characteristic portion 73AK; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows time saving end judging processing of characteristic part 73AK. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing of characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example based on characteristic part 73AK. It is a timing chart until the end of the time saving state of the characteristic portion 73AK. It is a flow chart which shows time saving end judging processing of a modification of characteristic part 73AK.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko game machine is shown as an example of a game machine, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine, and may be other game machines such as a coin game machine.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. The pachinko game machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame (not shown) attached to the inner side of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and an openable and closable game frame. and a glass door frame 2 formed in a picture frame shape.

A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame. Below the hit ball supply tray 3, there are a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3, and a ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 3. A batting operation handle (operation knob) 5 to be operated is provided. At the back of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 having a game area 7 in which hit game balls can flow down is detachably attached. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. - 特許庁In the game area 7, some of the game nails are shown. The hitting ball shooting device is driven by a shooting motor, and the force (shooting intensity) for hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the rotational operation position of the hitting ball operation handle 5 . Thereby, the player can aim at a desired place in the game area 7 and shoot the game ball.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect patterns as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. In the game area 7, the first path of the downflow paths along which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in the area on the left side of the effect display device 9 as viewed from the front, and the first path out of the downflow paths along which the game balls flow down is provided. A second route different from the first route is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right hitting. The first path may be called a left-handed path because it is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area 7 . Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 7, so it may be called a right-handed path.

Note that the first route and the second route may be composed of different routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like.

A game ball fired from a ball shooting device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 5 and hit into the game area 7 is guided along, for example, an arrangement of game nails when guided to the left game area. As a result, guidance to the right game area becomes impossible or difficult. In addition, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example.

A first start winning opening 13 is provided as a structure into which the game balls hit in the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9 . The first start winning opening 13 is provided with a first starting winning opening switch 13a inside as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered.

A gate 32, a variable winning ball device 15, and a V determination winning device 87 are provided as structures into which game balls hit into the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning hole 14 in which game balls can win. In addition, as a switch for detecting the game ball that has entered into each, the gate switch 32a inside the gate 32, the second start winning opening switch 14a inside the second starting winning opening 14, the V judgment winning device Inside the 87, a V winning switch 87a, a V determination winning switch 15a and a V determination discharge switch 15b are provided, respectively. In the following, the game ball winning (entering) the first start winning opening 13 is called the first starting winning, and the game ball winning (entering) the second starting winning opening 14 is called the second starting winning.

The first start winning port 13 serves as a start winning device for starting variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as variable display means (variable display means), and a game ball (start winning ball) enters (wins a prize). ) is a possible winning structure. The second start winning port 14 serves as a start winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as variable display means (variable display means), and a game ball (start winning ball) enters (wins a prize). ) is a possible winning structure.

The gate 32 is a gate structure through which game balls can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, normal symbols are variably displayed. The normal pattern will be described later. In the left game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the first starting prize winning port 13 of the prize winning port structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning hole 13, the player can hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that game balls are guided to the second starting prize winning port 14 and the gate 32 of the prize winning structure. Therefore, when aiming for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player should hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the game ball hit to the right game area may enter the first start winning hole 13, but from the viewpoint of game performance, the possibility is that it is hit to the left game area. It is desirable to make the possibility of a game ball entering them extremely low. Conversely, it may be possible that the game ball hit to the left game area may enter the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of game performance, the possibility is limited to the right. It is desirable to make the possibility extremely low compared to the possibility that game balls hit into the game areas enter them.

The V judgment winning device 87 is a device for judging V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent member, and a state in which a game ball passes through it can be visually recognized. The V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a width that allows game balls to pass in the front-rear direction at the top, and walls are formed on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that is inclined from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A part is provided, and a guide path along which game balls are guided is formed. In the central part of the guide, when a small hit is made, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 times open period + 1 second closed period (interval period) × 9 times + 1 second end period) By repeating opening and closing, an operation opening is formed as an opening that allows a total of about 10 or more game balls to win within a predetermined period of time during which the opening is open. In the path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball to be guided are provided on both sides of the wall portion in a manner that alternately protrudes, so that when hitting to the right A structure (hereinafter referred to as deceleration structure) is formed in which the game balls slowly flow through the passage above the operation opening of the upper portion of the V judgment winning device 87 .

In the small hit game state, the V judgment winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time until it is detected that 10 game balls have entered the V judgment winning device 87, or until a predetermined period of time elapses. Opening control is executed. During such an opening control period, a round number suggesting effect shown in FIG. 20 and a continuous holding notification effect shown in FIG. certain renditions are feasible. In the V-judgment winning device 87 , the portion of the guideway where the operating opening is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873 . A movable portion 872 capable of moving back and forth over the operating port is provided at a position where the operating port can be opened and closed.

The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the operation port. In the state where the operation port is closed by the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. do. When the operating port is opened by the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port is opened in the guideway, so that the game ball guided to the guideway can drop from the operating port into the V judgment winning device 87. Become.

Inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 (actuation opening), a V prize winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V judgment prize winning device 87 in the horizontal direction as a prize winning region in which a game ball entering from the operation opening can win. Further, an inclined path 871 is provided to guide all the game balls entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 through an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide downward the gaming ball entering from the V winning opening.

At the uppermost end of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) that can switch the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state is provided. there is The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 24, and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the V winning opening is opened by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 can drop into the V winning area 870 . On the other hand, in the state where the V winning opening is closed by the state of the opening/closing member, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. , and can fall into a winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V determination winning device 87 is basically in an open state. When the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15 a provided in the V winning area 870 . In the small winning game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, the opening/closing member is controlled to the closed state, and the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 after that is within the winning ball area. will enter the A game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one game ball entering the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected by the V judgment prize switch 15a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V judgment prize winning switch 15b.

When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 15a and the V determination winning switch 15b reaches 10, the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 opened in the small winning game state is closed, and the game ball enters. made impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge in the lower part, and the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage is discharged into a predetermined area inside the game board 6. It is discharged to the discharge channel. The discharge path is provided with a V judgment discharge switch capable of detecting discharged game balls, and all game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

When a small hit occurs and the operation port of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened, the game ball enters the V prize winning region 870 and is detected by the V winning prize switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , the conditions for generating a big hit are established, and the game is controlled to a big-hit game state. Winning of a game ball to such a V winning area 870 is called V winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, during the period in which a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are produced on average without requiring any special operation. can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and furthermore, when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area It is structurally designed to enter the 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small hit occurs, right-hand hitting promotion notification is executed to instruct right-hand hitting so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87. be.

Therefore, when a small hit occurs, except when the player does not shoot the game ball during the opening period of the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 and when the player hits to the left, it is possible to hit to the right. In this case, the game ball will surely (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-judgment winning device 87 is provided with a game ball deceleration structure is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation opening that allows the game ball to fall is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V judgment winning device 87, and during the period of the small winning game state In order to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operation opening is opened 10 times.

A part of the front side of the V judgment winning device 87 is provided with a V lamp 875 which is a luminous body composed of an LED configured in the shape of the letter "V". The V lamp 875 basically emits white light when a V winning occurs in the small winning game state. The V lamp 875, for example, can basically emit white light, but can change its emission color to blue, red, and rainbow colors depending on the game situation, such as when informing a player on hold. is. It should be noted that the V lamp 875 may be provided on the front surface or inside the V judgment winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Also, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from the V judgment winning device 87 (for example, a position near the V judgment winning device 87, etc.).

The variable winning ball device 15 is a variable winning ball device that changes between a state (open state) that is advantageous to a player who can enter a game ball and a state (closed state) that is disadvantageous to a player who cannot enter a game ball. Equipped with a tulip-shaped opening wing (a pair of left and right) at the entrance, and a stopper member that restricts the entry of game balls when the opening wing is closed is provided above the opening wing. It is This opening winglet is driven by a solenoid 16 . The variable winning ball device 15 changes from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player by opening for a certain period of time (for example, one second) when the display result of the normal symbol is a hit. In addition, in the state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state, it is difficult to win a prize, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning port 13 and the second start prize-winning port 14 may be collectively referred to as a start prize-winning port or a start port.

In the right game area, a game nail is planted so that a game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87 . Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player can hit the game ball to the right.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that a game ball hit into the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V judgment winning device 87. It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that a game ball hit into the right game area will enter them.

In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of displaying various effects such as effects corresponding to variable display of special symbols is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, there is a first special symbol display that variably displays the first special symbol as variable display means that variably displays special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified. A device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each are provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). In the display screen of the production display device 9, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special design or the second special design, various images such as the variable display of the production design as a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified are displayed. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a pattern display area (symbol display area) that variably displays three decorative (effect) patterns (also called decorative patterns) of "left", "middle", and "right". is formed.

Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The performance display device 9 is controlled by a performance control microcomputer mounted on the performance control board. When the variation display of the first special symbol is being performed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variation display, and the second special symbol display is performed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the variable display of the special symbols is executed, if the performance display device 9 executes the performance display along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are collectively referred to as the special symbol display device (variation display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, but the game machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator. When only one special symbol display device is provided, only one start winning opening may be provided. In addition, even if only one special symbol display is provided, two (plurality) start winning openings are provided, and one special symbol display is displayed even when a game ball wins in any of the starting winning openings. A variable display may be controlled. In addition, when two (plural) special symbol indicators are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and the two special symbol indicators are variably displayed in a predetermined order (for example, variably displayed for each start winning). (such as switching the special symbol display) may be controlled.

A jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the game area 7 . In the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a game ball hit to the right is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. In addition, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area due to the planted state of the game nail.

The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 has a jackpot with a front surface covered with a rectangular door, and when a jackpot occurs, the door is tilted forward about the base by a solenoid 21 to reveal the jackpot. (opens mouth). Inside the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting a game ball that has entered is provided. To the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a winning route is set by a game nail or other structures so that the game ball can enter the big winning hole only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. Limited. It should be noted that even if the game ball is struck in either the left game area or the right game area, it may be possible to win the big prize opening.

When a game ball wins in any one of the first start prize winning port 13, the second start prize winning port 14, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, and the V judgment prize winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls is determined accordingly. is paid out. Note that prize balls may be paid out even when game balls pass through the gate 32 . In addition, at least one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be configured such that no prize balls are paid out even if a game ball wins.

At the bottom of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 through which hit balls that do not win a prize are taken. In addition, four speakers 27 for uttering effect sounds and voices as predetermined audio outputs are provided in the upper left and right parts and the lower left and right parts outside the game area 7 . A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7 .

A big hit is obtained when a big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 8a, and when a big win pattern (big win display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 8b. occurs in When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the first start winning hole 13, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display 8a. When a big win is determined by a lottery based on the winning of a game ball in the second starting prize opening 14, a big win pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display 8b.

A big hit is also generated when a game ball entered while the operation opening of the V judgment prize device 87 is open due to the small win game state entering the V prize area 870. - 特許庁Hereinafter, when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a, this is referred to as V winning. A small win is a win in which the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of V winning. In the V judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operation opening is opened is called a "small hit game state". Then, in the small win game state, a big win generated based on the fact that the game ball wins V is called a "big win via a small win". On the other hand, a big hit game state based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as "big hit by special symbols".

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a given value, and repeated continuous control for repeating the open state and the closed state of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 for a predetermined number of times is performed. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. Repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, after the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined open state termination condition (e.g., a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (e.g., 10 The closed state is established in response to the establishment of the opening end condition that the winning ball of 1) has been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is established, the continuation right is generated, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of openings in the jackpot game state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition (first execution condition) or the second starting condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition of the variable display, is established (for example, the game ball is After passing (including winning) the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as the starting winning area, the start condition of the fluctuation display (for example, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed) is established, and when the fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed. do. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes the game ball entering (winning) the winning opening. is. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means finally stopping display (determined display) of the pattern (an example of the identification information).

In addition, regarding the variable display in which the start condition has not been established even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, within the range of the predetermined upper limit number Storing information about a variable display for which the start condition has not yet been met is called pending storage. The term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information that has been retained. A pending memory is also called a starting memory or a starting winning memory.

As for the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 13 . As for the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 . When a big win occurs in a state where such a first reserve memory or a second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the occurrence of the big win is maintained as it is, and a variable display is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. used for

When the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs, even if there is a pending memory of the first start winning, the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second starting winning is preferentially executed. be done. Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second second display consisting of one display that displays the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved memories. A special symbol reservation memory display 18b is provided. The second special symbol reservation memory display 18b lights up the second special symbol reservation memory display 18b every time there is an effective start winning prize, and every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, The second special symbol reservation memory display 18b is extinguished.

Further above the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, a first special symbol reserved memory display consisting of four displays for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved memories. A vessel 18a is provided. The first special symbol holding storage display 18a increases the number of indicators that light up each time there is an effective start winning prize. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lights on the display is reduced by one.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display device 10 for variably displaying identifiable normal symbols. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is implemented by a simple and small display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0-9. Also, the small display is formed in a rectangular shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol "7"), a win is achieved, and the variable winning ball device 15 is kept from a closed state, which is disadvantageous to the player, only for a predetermined period of time. It changes to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, there is provided a normal symbol holding memory display 41 having four LED displays for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32. Each time the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol reservation memory display 41 increases the lighting LED by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 122 that can be gripped by the player and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, back, left, and right). The stick controller 122 is operated by a predetermined instruction operation such as pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, the index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with the operating hand (for example, the left hand). Trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) is provided, and inside the operation rod of stick controller 122 is a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as pushing or pulling operation on trigger button 125. is built-in. A tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation rod is provided inside the main body of the bottom plate of the stick controller 122 or the like. The stick controller 122 also incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122 .

A member forming the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 3 is, for example, at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body, and the player presses down a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so as to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the main body of the top plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed, or the like, for detecting the operation of the push button 120 by the player.

In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots the game balls so as to selectively use "left shot" aiming at the left game area and "right shot" aiming at the right game area. A game state and a performance state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts playing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

When the player takes a seat in the pachinko game machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game so that the game ball wins the first start winning hole 13 by striking to the left. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a big win (a big win by the special symbol), the left-handed hitting is switched to the right-handed hitting, and the game is played aiming at the released big-hit variable winning ball device 20.例文帳に追加. After the jackpot game state is over, right-handed promotion notification is given on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by right-handed. Specifically, a message such as “Aim right” is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 .

During the jackpot game state, the player aims at the opened jackpot variable winning ball device 20 by striking to the right. During the jackpot game state, right-handed promotion notification is performed. After the jackpot game state is over, the game is continued by hitting to the right when the later-described time-saving state is reached. After the jackpot game is finished, if the time saving state is established, the time saving notification for notifying that the time saving state is started is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9. - 特許庁In addition, during the time saving state, right hitting promotion information is also performed. If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the jackpot game state, the right-hand hit is switched to the left-hand hit by the end of the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state, and the game ball wins the first start prize-winning port 13.例文帳に追加Play as you would. In addition, when the time-saving state does not occur, left-handed promotion notification (also called left-handed notification) is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to return to left-handed and play the game. may

During the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, the game is performed aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning hole 14 by striking to the right. When the game ball enters the second starting prize-winning port 14 and the display result is a big win (a big win by a special symbol), the game is played aiming at the big-hit variable winning ball device 20 while striking to the right. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole 14 and the display result becomes a small win display result, the operation hole of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so V A game is played aiming at the judgment winning device 87.例文帳に追加At the start of the small winning game state, a small winning start notification for notifying the start of the small winning game state is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9.例文帳に追加In addition, when controlled to the small hit game state, a small win executed before the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened according to the small hit as described later according to the specific timing (according to the game situation) At the start timing of the winning display or at a predetermined timing before the execution of the small winning display, the right-handed promotion notification is also performed.

When the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hit game state, the game ball falls from the operation opening into the V judgment prize winning device 87, enters the V prize winning area 870 and is detected, When a V prize is generated, a big win is generated via a small win. When the V prize is generated, the V prize notification is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the V prize has been generated. Further, when the small winning game state ends, a small winning end notification for notifying that the small winning game state has ended is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9.例文帳に追加After the end of the small winning, a big winning game state is entered and the big winning variable winning ball device 20 is released, so that the player plays the game aiming at the big winning variable winning ball device 20 while striking to the right.

Also, when a game is played aiming at the V judgment winning device 87 in the small hit game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 and enters a non-specific area (not shown) other than the V winning area 870 does not generate a jackpot. In this way, when the V prize is not generated during the small winning game state, a V prize failure notification is performed on the screen of the performance display device 9 to inform that the V prize has failed. Further, at the end of the small winning game state, a small winning end notification for notifying that the small winning game state has ended is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9.例文帳に追加After the end of the small winning game state, when the time saving state continues, the player continues to play the game aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 while striking to the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the game ball wins in the first start prize-winning opening 13 by switching from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting. At the end of the time-saving state, a time-saving end notification for notifying that the time-saving is finished on the screen of the performance display device 9 and a left-handed promotion notification for urging the player to return to left-handed and play the game are performed.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, conditions for occurrence of a big win, a control state (game state) after a big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in a big win, and the opening time of each round in a big win. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 15R short time big hit, the pattern 4R short time big hit, the small hit via 16 (15) R short time big hit, the small hit 9 (8) R short time big hit, and the small hit via 5 ( 4) R time reduction jackpot is provided. The parenthesis of the big hit via the small hit shows the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened.

A small hit occurs when a game ball enters a second start winning hole 14 provided in a variable winning ball device 15 and the display result of the second special symbol becomes a small winning symbol. Determination as to whether or not the display result of the special symbol is to be a small winning symbol is made in advance by a random number lottery (small winning determination of special symbols). When a small win occurs, a small win game state is entered, and the operation port of the V judgment winning device 87 is opened with an opening pattern of 10 opening times and 0.1 second opening time. The game control state after the end of the small hit game state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base, which will be described later) is the same as before the small hit. In the small win, a prize ball is paid out to the game ball that has won the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small winning game state, it is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated, and it is set that about 30 winning balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the operation port of the V determination prize winning device 87 is open, the game ball is entered into the operation port, and the game ball enters the V prize area 870 inside the V determination prize winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. do. A big win via such a small win is called a big win via a small win as described above. Jackpots via small hits include 16 (15) R-time short jackpots via small hits, 9 (8) R-time short jackpots via small hits, and 5 (4) R-short time jackpots via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the jackpot. be A small hit that is linked so as to be a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is called a first small win. 9 (8) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the second small hit. 5 (4) The small hit that is linked to be the R time-saving jackpot is called the third small win.

On the other hand, a big hit that is generated directly by a variable display of special symbols without going through a small win is called a big hit in design. The symbol jackpot includes a symbol 15R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this way, the big wins are the symbol big win directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the V winning via the small winning based on the variable display of the second special symbol. It includes a big hit via a small hit. Each of the symbol jackpot and the jackpot via the jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. The advantageous state advantageous to the player in this embodiment also includes the opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 .

Here, the time-saving state will be explained. The time saving state is an example of a special game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player. The time saving state is a control state in which the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol (effect symbol) is shortened from the non-time saving state (normal state). In this way, by shifting to the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of special symbols and performance symbols is shortened, so that when the time-saving state is reached, effective starting winnings are more likely to occur, and the possibility of a jackpot game being performed. increase.

In the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased to facilitate winning of the variable winning ball device 15 ( It is controlled to a high base state with high penetration, high frequency).

Here, the "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in accordance with winning to the number of shot balls. A "high base state" is a state in which active control is performed to increase this ratio. On the other hand, the state in which such control is not performed is the "low base state". Such control is realized, for example, as a control that increases the occurrence of starting winnings that trigger the start of fluctuation of special symbols. For this reason, in the present embodiment, by increasing the frequency and number of openings of the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip), or by lengthening the opening time of one time, the variable winning ball device is operated. It can be realized as a control for facilitating prize winning. Such control is also called "electric chew support control". In other words, the high base state means that by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15, which triggers the variation of special symbols, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased and variable. This is a control state in which winning to the winning ball device 15 is facilitated (higher entry, higher frequency). "Electric chewing support control" is generally called by the abbreviation "electric sapo", and the abbreviation "electric sapo" may be used in this embodiment as well.

Furthermore, high base control (electric chew support control) will be described in detail. As a high base control (Electronic support control), the control to derive and display the display result early by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal pattern (time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) (normal pattern shortening control), control to increase the probability that the stop pattern of the normal pattern becomes a winning pattern (normal pattern probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (normal electric accessory) (opening time extension control), and , Control for increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device is opened (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, compared to when the control is not performed, the variable winning ball device, which triggers the variation of the special symbols, is in an open state at a higher ratio of time, so that the game balls are started. It becomes easy to win a prize (the execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 becomes easy to be established).

Also, the pattern 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 15 times (15R). The pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened four times (4R). In the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 15 times, and the player can win the same big hit as the pattern 15R short time jackpot with regard to opening the big prize opening. I feel categorical. 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the big jackpot is opened 8 times (8R) under the condition of V prize after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times). is. In the 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 4 times (4R) under the condition of V winning. The prize winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is actually opened is 4, and the player can get the same big hit as the pattern 4R short time jackpot with regard to the opening of the big prize opening. I feel categorical.

The time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving big hit is the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 1, and the end condition that the total number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set for . The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is once is set for the following reasons. In the case of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, basically, the time-saving state (including electric power supply state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make the game ball enter the gate 32 by striking to the right to open the variable winning ball device 15, and to make the game ball win the variable winning ball device 15 in that state, such a variable winning ball device 15.例文帳に追加It takes a long time to win the game ball, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be variably displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start winning, which can be stored up to four before the game state, one of the second special symbols which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is a condition for ensuring that the variable display for batches can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined to be an advantageous big hit for the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the big hit other than the 4R time-saving big hit, the end condition is that the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is seven times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first starting winning port 13 is provided so as to be able to win from the first path. This is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winnings than when game balls flow down two paths. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, since the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win a prize from the second path, the game ball flowing down the second path is better than the first path. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of winning a prize at the time of a big hit than when the game ball flows down. In addition, in a specific state such as a small winning game state, the V judgment winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more likely to flow down the first path. This is more advantageous for the player in terms of the occurrence of a big hit than when the game ball flows down.

It should be noted that the comparison of advantages is not limited to this. and the second path, and in the low base state as the normal state, the first path is easier to win the variable winning slot than the second path, and the high base state, the big win game state, and the small In other states such as a winning game state, the second route is more likely to win the variable winning slot than the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and in other game states, it is advantageous for the player to have the game medium flow down the second path.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the performance control board 80, and the like. The main board 31 is equipped with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), etc., a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I/O port section. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which ROM 54 and RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further incorporates a random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by hardware circuits).

Also, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, partly or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

In addition, since the CPU 56 in the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on boards other than the main board 31 .

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a judgment random number for judging whether or not to give a small hit according to the display result of the variable display of special symbols. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates at random timing. Based on the fact that the time of starting winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generating function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random number. The game control microcomputer 560 also has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503 .

In addition, the detection signals from each of the gate switch 32a, the first starting winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning opening switch 87a, the V determination winning opening switch 15a, and the V determination discharge switch 15b are used for game control. An input driver circuit 58 for the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31 . In addition, a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a solenoid 22 for opening and closing the V judgment winning device 87 (movable part 872), and a V winning judgment winning device 87 ( The solenoid 22 for opening and closing the area 870 movable part 87), the solenoid 24 for opening and closing the V winning area 870 (opening and closing member), and the output circuit 59 driven according to the command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. It is The payout control board 37 controls the payout of paid balls by controlling the ball payout device 97 .

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display device 8a that variably displays special symbols, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display device 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol reservation memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 is performed.

The production control board 80 is equipped with a production control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I/O port section 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs, data, and the like for effect control such as display control. A RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100 . The VDP 109 performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 .

The performance control microcomputer 100 receives a performance control command from the game control microcomputer 560 through the relay board 77 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main substrate 31 to the direction of the performance control board 80. In addition to performing variable display control of the effect display device 9, through the lamp driver board 35, display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side, display control of the V lamp 875, and voice output board Various effect control such as control of sound output from the speaker 27 via 70 is performed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 is detected from the trigger sensor 121 via the I/O port section 105. input. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal from the push sensor 124 via the I/O port section 105 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the push button 120 has been detected. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 transmits an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operator's operation act on the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the I/O port section 105. to enter. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I/O port section 105 .

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 4 shows the type of random number, update range, usage, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random 1: A random counter for determining whether or not to make a big win and whether or not to make a small win. The random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, updated from 0 to 65535 which is the upper limit, and then updated from 0 again. (2) Random 2: Type of jackpot (type, pattern 15R short-time jackpot, pattern 4R short-time jackpot, via small hit 16 (15) R short-time jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R short-time jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) Any type of R time-saving jackpot) and a jackpot pattern are determined (for jackpot type determination, jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 3: Determine the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the type of variation pattern). (4) Random 4: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 5: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design (for normal design hit determination). (6) Random 6: Determine the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the big hits in the specific game state are a symbol 15R short time big hit, a symbol 4R short time big hit, a small win via a 16 (15) R short time big hit, a small win via a 9 (8) R short time big hit, and a small hit. A plurality of types of Via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpots are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the random number for judging the hit (random R), or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for judging the big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big win via a small win, the decided big win becomes invalid unless a V winning occurs. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also the random number for determining the jackpot symbol.

Also, when it is determined to be the type of the small hit, the design of the small hit is determined at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a small winning symbol determination random number.

In addition, the variation pattern first determines the variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2), and uses the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3), any included in the determined variation pattern type Determine the variation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type without reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type that is a fluctuation pattern type with reach.

Such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different when the display result is out, when it is in the time saving state and when it is not in the time saving state, so that the time saving state When , the fluctuation time is shortened compared to when it is not in the time saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when it is not in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than when it is not short-time, or the most fluctuation among the fluctuation pattern types The rate of selecting the fluctuation pattern type with the shortest time is high, and even when the reach type is selected, it is set so that the rate of choosing the normal reach fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation pattern types is high. By doing so, the average time of fluctuation time is shorter than when it is not in the time saving state.

In addition, such a variation pattern type includes a variation pattern type that can be selected when it becomes a small hit (for example, a variation pattern type in which an effect related to a small hit is executed, etc.) includes unselectable variation pattern types (for example, variation pattern types in which effects unrelated to small hits are executed). Such variation pattern types that can be selected when a small win is achieved are variation patterns in which a specific effect is executed, and include variation patterns in which a predetermined suggestive effect related to a small win is executed. Therefore, when a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestive effect relating to such a small win is executed is executed, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation. Variation pattern types that can be selected for a small hit can be selected both for a small hit and for a non-small hit. is set so that the rate of selection is high. As a result, even if the type of variation pattern is selectable when a small win is achieved, it may occur when the small win is not achieved, so that the player is preliminarily aware that the type of variation pattern to be executed will result in a small win. You can make sure it doesn't get lost. On the other hand, the type of variation pattern that cannot be selected when a small win is made is, for example, a variation pattern that is not related to a small win, such as a variation pattern that suggests that a big win will be made directly without going through a small win. By disabling selection when a small win is achieved, it is possible to avoid complicating the relationship between the effect of the variation pattern and the display result. It should be noted that the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit is set is set so that a variation pattern set to a specific variation time is selected based on the correspondence relationship with the opening control of the V judgment winning device 87. . By making it possible to execute such a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestive effect relating to the small win is executed when the small win occurs, the player's expectation for the small win can be heightened at the time of the variable display. can. Furthermore, the player can easily cope with the game peculiar to the small winning game state that it is necessary to enter the game ball into the V judgment winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain a big win. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to escape from an advantageous state in which a game ball enters the V judgment winning device 87.例文帳に追加

Also, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small win is achieved may not be limited to a specific variation time. Further, the variation pattern that can be selected when the small win is achieved may not be one in which a predetermined suggestive effect regarding the small win is executed. In addition, different variation patterns may be provided depending on when a small win is achieved, when a loss is achieved, and when a big win is achieved. In addition, the variation pattern is not classified according to when it becomes a small hit, when it becomes a loss, and when it becomes a big hit, and the type of variation pattern to be selected is selected regardless of the variation display result. may have the same range.

In addition, instead of setting the variation pattern type and the variation pattern separately and determining the variation pattern by a two-stage lottery process, only the random number for determining the variation pattern is used without providing the variation pattern type, one stage may be used to determine the variation pattern.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special prize determination table, a second special prize determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in the ROM54.

FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing the first special figure per determination table. The first special symbol winning judgment table is a data table for making a big winning judgment with respect to the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big winning judgment value to be compared with random 1 is set. "Probability" shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

FIG. 5(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure per determination table. The second special hit determination table is a data table for judging a big hit and a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, and is set with a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random 1. It is a table with The upper stage in FIG. 5(B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower stage in FIG. 5(B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper part of FIG. 5(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of FIG. 5(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of getting a small hit.

When the CPU 56 detects a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (first starting winning) or a starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (second starting winning), the CPU 56 generates a random number at a predetermined timing. The count value (random R) of circuit 503 is extracted. As for the first start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the first special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches one of the big hit judgment values, a big hit is given with respect to the first special pattern. to decide. As for the second start prize, the extracted value is compared with the big hit judgment value set in the second special prize judgment table, and when the extracted value matches any one of the big hit judgment values, the second special pattern is given a big hit. to decide. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the big hit determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit determination value set in the second special hit determination table, and the extracted value matches any of the small hit determination values. If they match, it is decided to make a small win with respect to the second special symbol. Determining to make a small win also means making a provisional decision to make a big win via a small win (because it is not controlled as a big win unless a V winning occurs during a small win, it is described as a temporary decision). .

Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big win game state. It is also about deciding whether to do it or not. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to shift to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not.

Although the first special symbol is set so as not to be judged as a small hit, the first special symbol may be set so as to be judged as a small hit with a predetermined probability.

5(C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 5(C) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 5(D) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, "symbol 15R short time jackpot" and "symbol 4R short time jackpot" A big hit judgment value corresponding to each is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(D), a jackpot determination value corresponding to the "symbol 15R short time jackpot", which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, is set.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 5(C) and (D), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a decision value (jackpot pattern determination value) for determining the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the determination value corresponding to the "8R short-time jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "15R time-saving big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit symbol "7".

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. A big hit determination value corresponding to each of the via 9 (8) R short time big hit” and the “small hit via 5 (4) R short time big hit” is set. However, the jackpot types determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table are the first jackpot (16 (15) R time short jackpot) and the second jackpot (9 (8) R time short jackpot). , is a temporary jackpot type linked to each of the third jackpots (5 (4) R short-time jackpots), and is invalid if V winning does not occur in the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, the first time-saving state (variation display 1 to 5 times) and the second time-saving state (variation Since there are a plurality of kinds of time-saving states such as 7 to 11 times of display, the game in the time-saving state is rich in variety, and the interest in the game is improved.

Next, the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state of various jackpots will be described. Here, the time saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time saving jackpot will be described as a typical example. FIG. 6 is a table showing an example of the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit.

After the end of the jackpot game state of the 4R time-saving jackpot, the fluctuation of the first special pattern and the second special pattern in the first time-saving state controlled to the time-saving state over a relatively small number of fluctuation display times (1 time to 5 times). As for the display, when comparing the case where the reserved memory of the first special symbol exists before the occurrence of the big win game state and the case where the reserved memory of the first special symbol does not exist before the occurrence of the big win game state, As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the execution balance mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state is different.

FIG. 6A shows a variable display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is one reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start of time saving state control. FIG. 6(B) shows a variable display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is no reserved storage of the first special symbol at the start of time saving state control.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when the jackpot game state is controlled in the state where the first reserve memory or the second reserve memory exists, the reserve memory that existed before the control to the jackpot game state is replaced with the jackpot game state. The stored state is continued during the state and is carried over until after the big win game state is ended, and is used for the variable display after the big win game state is ended.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), at the start of the first time-saving state after the end of the 4R time-saving big hit jackpot game state, the first special symbol based on the reserved memory that existed before the control to the jackpot game state. When there is a pending memory, the game ball has not yet started winning the second starting winning port 14 for variable display of the second special symbol to be preferentially executed, so in the time saving state, first, 1 As the variable display for the first time, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol carried over from before the occurrence of the big win game state is executed. In the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of the 8R time-saving jackpot, a game is performed in which a game ball is entered into the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14 by hitting to the right, and then as shown in FIG. 6(A). Then, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 can be executed.

After the start of the time saving state, until the start winning to the second start winning port 14 occurs, when the first special symbol has a reserved memory, the variable display of the first special pattern is based on the reserved memory. is executed. In FIG. 6(A), after the start of the time saving state, one of the first special symbols that existed before the control to the big hit game state until the start winning to the second start winning port 14 occurred An example is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once based on the reserved storage. In FIG. 6 (A), after the start of the time saving state, based on the fact that the variation display based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 was executed once for the second time, after the start of the time saving state, the second time An example is shown in which the time reduction control has ended in the variable display.

As for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, four pieces of pending storage information are possible as described above. Therefore, after the start of the first time saving state, for example, the variable winning ball device 15 in the electric support state executed until one execution of the variable display based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is completed During the open control state, as shown in FIG. 6(A), a maximum of four pieces of second reserved storage information can occur. In this embodiment, in the case of the first time saving state, the variable display with a certain amount of long variable display time is based on the first start winning to the second start winning port 14 so that the second reservation storage information is easy to accumulate is executed. It should be noted that such variable display with a somewhat long variable display time may not be executed.

After that, when the second reserved storage information is stored until one execution of the variable display based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is completed, for example, the third time in FIG. ~ As shown in the variable display column of the second special symbol of the 6th time, the variable display based on the maximum of 4 second reservation storage information is executed, and the small winning lottery with a winning probability of about 1/7 is the second reservation It becomes possible to execute only the number of pieces of stored information. As a result, even when the first time saving state ends, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big hit via the small win based on the second holding storage information generated during the first time saving state can be heightened.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(B), at the start of the time saving state, when there is no holding memory of the first special symbol based on the holding memory that existed before the control to the big hit game state, the 4R time saving big hit In a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, a game is played in which a game ball enters the gate 32 and the second starting prize winning port 14 by striking to the right, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting prize winning port 13.例文帳に追加Since the gaming state is entered, as shown in FIG. 6(B), the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14 can be executed from the first variable display. Also in this case, as in the case of FIG. 6A with reserved storage, a maximum of four pieces of second reserved storage information as shown in FIG. 6B can occur. As a result, even when the first time saving state ends, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big hit via the small win based on the second holding storage information generated during the first time saving state can be heightened.

After the jackpot gaming state of the 4R time saving jackpot ends, the conditions for ending the first time saving state are, as described above, whether the second special symbol is displayed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. It is established when the variable display is executed a total of 5 times.

As shown in FIG. 6(A), at the start of the time saving state, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on one reserved memory of the first special symbol that existed at the start is executed once, When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the second time, the end condition is satisfied by executing the variable display of the second special symbol once by executing the second variable display. It is materialized and control of the 1st time saving state is ended.

As shown in FIG. 6(B), at the start of the time saving state, if there is no reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start and the second special symbol is displayed from the first time, 1 In the first variable display, the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is executed once, so that the ending condition of the time saving state is established, and the control of the time saving state is ended.

The end condition of the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of the 4R time saving jackpot is that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special pattern is executed once or the total number of fluctuation display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. It is set to be established when the number of times is five. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 6A, even if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state, in the first time saving state, from the variable display of the first special symbol The variable display of the second special symbol, which is also advantageous for the player, is executed the same number of times (once) as when the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the first time saving state, so that the first time saving State ends.

Also, for example, even if there is a maximum of four reserved memories of the first special symbols at the start of the first time saving state, the variable display of the first special symbols based on the four reserved memories in the first time saving state. is executed, the first time saving state is terminated by being executed the same number of times (once) as when the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the first time saving state.

In this way, the end condition of the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of the 4R time saving jackpot is that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol By setting to be established when the total number of times of the variable display is executed 5 times, the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state is stored when there is a reserved memory and when it is not. During the control period of the 1 hour reduction state, the number of executable times of the variable display of the second special symbol which is advantageous for the player can be the same number of times, so there is a difference between advantages and disadvantages for the player in the time reduction state (high base state). It is possible to prevent this and ensure the fairness of the game.

As shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6, etc., the end condition of the first time saving state defined by the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number of times variable display by the first reserved storage is performed. Since it is set to the total number of times (4 times) and the specific number of times (1 time) that the predetermined variation display is performed for the second special symbol, in the first time saving state, the variation due to the first reservation storage Even if the display is performed a certain number of times, it is possible to prevent a difference in advantage or disadvantage for the player due to the first reserved storage information, and to secure the fairness of the game.

In addition, for the jackpot types other than the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot, the minimum number of fluctuation display times “1” in the time-saving state in the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot described above is replaced with “7”. The variable display count "5" is replaced with "11". Therefore, even in the jackpot types other than the symbol 4R short time jackpot, in the same way as in the case of the 8R short time jackpot, the presence or absence of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol at the start of the first short time state after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R short time jackpot. And regardless of how much, the second time saving state continues until the second special symbol variation display of the same seven times is executed. As a result, for the jackpot types other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, the same effect as that obtained for the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot described above can be obtained.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the number of time-saving (electrical support) times after a big hit is set to a relatively small number of times, as described above, the player It is preferable to avoid the number of times of time saving (electrical support) that is disadvantageous to

7 and 8 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. FIG. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the command name, and the designated contents of the command. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

Main commands in FIGS. 7 and 8 will be explained. The command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) specifying a variation pattern to be variably displayed on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. Moreover, the production control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the command 80XX(H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols.

Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result specifying commands that indicate display results including loss display results, big hit types, big hit display results for each small hit type, and small hit display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. The command 8F00(H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A1XX(H) is a special prize opening designation command indicating that the special prize opening is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX(H) is a post-opening big winning hole designation command indicating after opening (closing) the big winning hole for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state for each jackpot type.

Command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the game state is the normal state (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designation command that designates the first reserved storage number. "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved storage quantity designation command for designating a second reserved storage quantity. "XX" in the command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560, in the case of subtracting the number of reserved memories, transmits a reserved memory number designation command that designates the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but not limited to this, For each of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, a reserved memory count subtraction designation command may be used that designates subtraction of 1 from the reserved memory count.

Command C2XX (H) and command C3XX (H) are used to determine the results of winning determination such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern type determination, etc. It is an effect control command indicating the content. Among them, the command C2XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will occur, whether or not a small win will occur, and the determination result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results is.

The command C401 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. The command C402(H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command designating the start of the first small hit. Command C502 (H) is a command that designates the start of the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command designating the start of the third small hit. The command C601(H) is a V prize designation command that designates that there is a V prize. Command C602(H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that designates detection of winning balls (both V winning balls and winning balls other than V winning balls) to the V judgment winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is provided with a first pending storage buffer for storing the pending storage information of the first special symbol. In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the first reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) which is a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

As for the second special symbol, the RAM 55 is provided with a second reserved storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the second special symbol. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. In the second reservation storage buffer, a hardware random number for judging a jackpot (random R), a random number for judging a jackpot type (random 1) as a software random number, a random number for judging a variation pattern type (random 2), and , a random number for determining a variation pattern (random 3) is stored.

Based on the winning to the first starting winning port 13, the CPU 56 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserve storage buffer. Execute the process to save (store). Specifically, based on the winning to the first start winning opening 13, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reservation storage buffer. In addition, based on the winning of the second startup winning port 14, the CPU 56 extracts random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and stores them in the second reserved storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing) in the area. Specifically, based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved storage buffer.

Such storage of the above-described start-up winning information in the pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." In addition, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the pending storage buffer at the time of the start winning, but the variation pattern setting process described later. You may make it extract (at the time of the fluctuation|variation start of a special design).

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms) and timer interrupt processing is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main process, for example, necessary initial setting process, normal initialization process, non-normal game state recovery process, random number circuit setting process (random number circuit 503 is initialized), display random number update process (variation pattern Various random number update processing such as type determination and variation pattern determination), and initial value random number update processing (normally per symbol determination random number generation counter initial value update processing) etc. are executed.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as "S") 20-S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is executed to detect whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power has turned on) (S20). Next, through the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start prize opening switch 13a, the second start prize opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V prize switch 87a, the V judgment prize switch 15a, and the V judgment discharge A detection signal from the switch 15b is input to determine their states (switch processing: S21).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol reservation memory display 18a, a second special symbol reservation memory display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the reserved memory display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33 to run.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each judgment random number such as a normal symbol hit judgment random number and a small hit type judgment random number used for game control is performed (judgment random number update process: S23 ). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the big winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Then, normal symbol process processing is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the game state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information, etc., which are supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start prize winning port switch 13a, the second start prize winning port switch 14a and the accessory winning prize switch 25a (S30).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The content is output to the output port (S31: output processing).

In addition, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effecting display of special symbols according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data ( S32).

Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for performing a normal symbol effect display in an output buffer for normal symbol display control data setting according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display device 10 .

After that, the interrupt enabled state is set (S34), and the process ends. By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the big winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the starting port switch passing process is executed (S311). Then, one of the processes of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

In the game control microcomputer 560, as described above, the RAM 55 stores pending memory data (first pending memory data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13. and a second suspension storage buffer in which suspension storage data (second suspension storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning to the second start winning port 14 is stored. is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of reserved storages (4 for the first reserved storage data and 4 for the second reserved storage data) is secured.

In the starting port switch passage processing, if the first starting port switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first retained data The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts is increased by 1, and numerical data from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for judging variation pattern types, and fluctuation pattern judgment random numbers) and store them in a save area in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second starting port switch 14a is turned on, a second timer that counts the number of second reserved memory data stored on the condition that the second reserved memory number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Increase the value of the reserved memory number counter by 1, and extract numerical data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for judging a variation pattern type, and a random number for judging a variation pattern) from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. and save (store) them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer.

With respect to the discussion of pending storage below, the storage of such information relating to initial winnings in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer may be referred to as "stored pending." Further, the numerical data stored in the first reserved storage buffer may be called first reserved storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second reserved storage buffer may be called second reserved storage information. As I said.

The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows.
The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is to be a small hit, and determining the type of the small hit in the case of a small hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) is a process of determining the variation pattern and controlling the start of the variation time timer.

The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling transmission of a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. The special symbol fluctuation process (S303) is a process to advance the process to a special symbol stop process when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses. In the special symbol stop processing (S304), the variation display on the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b is performed when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is counted by the variation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

The big winning hole opening pre-processing (S305) is a process for controlling the opening of the big winning hole in the variable big winning ball device 20 when the big winning game state is entered. In the process of opening the big winning opening (S306), the control of transmitting the production control command for the round display during the big winning game state to the production control microcomputer 100, the process of confirming the establishment of the conditions for closing the big winning opening, etc. are performed. processing. When the conditions for closing the big winning opening are satisfied and there is still no remaining round, the process shifts to big winning end processing. The jackpot end process (S307) is a process for performing control, etc. for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the jackpot game state.

The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a process for performing control such as opening the operation opening in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit game state is entered. Small hit opening process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not the game ball has won a V prize in the V prize area 870 in the V judgment prize winning device 87, and transmitting a V prize designation command when the V prize has been won, and , It is a process of performing processing such as processing of transmitting a small hit end designation command when the end timing of a small win comes.

The small-hit end processing (S310) is a process for shifting to a big-hit gaming state when a game ball has won a V prize in the V-winning area 870 in the big-hit variable winning ball device 20 (transmitting a big-hit start designation command, displaying a big-hit game, etc.). setting of time, setting of jackpot opening mode, transition setting of process flag of big winning port opening pre-processing, etc.), and on the other hand, when the V winning is not performed, special This is the process of executing the process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the starting port switch passage processing of S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first starting port switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting port switch 13a is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether the number of first reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of first reserved memories for counting the number of first reserved memories). whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, the random number for judging the jackpot (random R), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 1), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 2), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-winning effect process for determining in advance the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected first special symbol starting prize is executed thereafter (S1215).

In this embodiment, a starting prize to the first starting prize winning port 13 or the second starting prize winning port 14 occurs, and after various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is stored as reserved storage information, the variable display starts. When the condition is satisfied, at the timing of starting the variable display, the special symbol normal process (S300), based on the reserved storage information, changes the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) to start the variable display. Whether or not the display result is the big win display result and the big win type are determined based on the big win determination value and the big win type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S301) is based on the variation pattern type determination value set corresponding to the various random values and the variation pattern determination value. based on

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the start of the variable display based on the start winning to the first start winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14, specifically, the game ball is the first start At the timing when the starting prize is won in the winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (the timing when the reserved memory information is stored), the reserved memory information storing various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is read in advance, and the read-ahead reservation is performed. Based on the stored information, determination of whether or not a big win will occur, determination of whether or not a minor win will occur, determination of the type of the big win, and determination of the variation pattern type are carried out in correspondence with the aforementioned various random numbers. Based on the set jackpot determination value, jackpot type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value, a win effect process for prefetching determination is executed. By doing so, the performance control microcomputer 100 predicts the result of the variable display in advance before the variable display of the performance symbols is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, the performance symbols are displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead announcement that foretells a big win (possibility of a big win) during the variable display.

Then, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1216), and transmits a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and sets the value of the first reserved storage number counter to EXT data to specify the first reserved storage number. Control is performed to transmit a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1219).

By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first Each time the start winning opening 13 is started and won, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.例文帳に追加

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designation command and a set of four commands, ie, the first reserved storage number specifying command, are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second starting switch 14a is on (S1221). If the second starter switch 14a is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the number of second reserved memories has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the number of second reserved memories for counting the number of second reserved memories). whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process is terminated.

If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes processing for storing them in the save area in the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, the random number for judging the jackpot (random 1), the random number for deciding the jackpot type (random 2), the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern type (random 3), and the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern (random 4) are extracted, Stored in the save area.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing similar to the winning effect processing described in S1215 for the detected start winning of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect process at the time of winning (S1226), and control to transmit a variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S1227). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second starting winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and sets the value of the second reserved storage number counter to EXT data to specify the second reserved storage number. Control is performed to transmit a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1229).

By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, the second Each time a start winning opening 14 is started and won, both a symbol designating command and a variation type command are surely transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.例文帳に追加

Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the second starting winning designation command and a set of four commands, ie, the second reserved storage number designation command, are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing a special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

If it is determined in S51 that there is no pending storage data in the pending storage buffer, the processing is terminated after performing a process (S80) for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command. On the other hand, when there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a according to whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 8a based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. be On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. is performed.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 8b based on the data of the second reserved storage is It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores each random value stored in the save area corresponding to the first reserved memory count=1 in the first reserved memory buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM55.

Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of the save area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "first", the CPU56, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM55, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM55 store each random value in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like Also, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number=1, 2, 3, 4. It's like

Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserve memory number specifying command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserve memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S59). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating "first" indicating that the process is performed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, "first special symbol" indicating that the process is performed for the first special symbol ', or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the process is performed for the second special symbol Data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processes in the special symbol process process, the process corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 56 reads random 1 (random number for judging a big hit) from the random number buffer and executes a judging module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the random number for judging a big hit extracted at S1214 of the starting switch passing process or S1224 of the starting switch passing process and stored in the reservation storage buffer or the random number buffer, and judges the big hit. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judging value (see FIG. 5) or small hit judging value (see FIG. 5) with the big hit judging random number, and if they match, it will be a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes the process of determining. That is, it is a program for executing a process of judging a big hit or a process of judging a small hit.

In the big hit determination process, if the first special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5(A), the second special symbol matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5(B) Then, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of S60), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big win game state, but it also means to decide whether or not to make the stop pattern on the special pattern display device a big win pattern. .

If it is determined to be a big win in S61 (Y of S61), a big win flag indicating a big win is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is "first", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(C) is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer does not indicate "first" (if it indicates "second"), select the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5(D) (S74), S75. proceed to

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type. Determine (S75) and proceed to S81.

Also, if the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the big hit determination values in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By confirming whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). When the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not the data indicating the "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 which will be described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (variation display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5(B) is used to determine whether or not the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the small hit determination values, thereby performing small hit determination processing (S76). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, select the small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. The jackpot type corresponding to the value is determined as the jackpot via small hit type (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any small hit determination value in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82, which will be described later.

In S81, data indicating the type of the jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the jackpot type is "symbol 15R time-saving jackpot", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "symbol 4R time-saving jackpot", data indicating the jackpot type. "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "16 (15) R short-time jackpot via small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer different from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is the small hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot, "05" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. Among these, the data indicating the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit are the V prizes in the small hit game state. There is data that will be invalid without the occurrence of a big hit if a is not generated, and is provisionally set.

In S82, a special symbol stop symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, any one of "1", "5" and "9", which are the small hit patterns corresponding to the small hit type selected and determined in S80, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. do. When the jackpot flag is set, either "3" or "7", which is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type selected and determined in S75, is determined as the stop pattern of the special pattern. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S79).

FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process.

In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control processing of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. When it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a design determination designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, when the jackpot flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

If the jackpot flag is set as when the symbol 15R time-saving jackpot or symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is determined, the CPU 56 determines that the time-saving flag, which is the flag that is set when controlled to the time-saving state, is set. When it is set, the time-saving flag is reset (S134), and either a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command is sent to the production control microcomputer 100 according to the determined jackpot type. command (jackpot start designation command) (S135).

As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of the jackpot is the pattern 15R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

Also, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time during which the effect display device 9 notifies that the big win has occurred) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S136). Thereafter, in the pre-opening processing for the large winning opening, the large winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening is opened and the round is started.

In addition, according to the jackpot type specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each jackpot type stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times) , or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds) are set in a predetermined storage area (S137). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (S138) to a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305), and the process is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the big winning opening pre-opening process.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in the aforementioned S133, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hit open pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit open control timer used for the small hit open control (for example, 10 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 second), and data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time between openings are set in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to small hit opening pre-processing.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is checked whether the time saving flag indicating the time saving state by the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). In S142, when the time saving flag is not set, it is not in the time saving state, so the process proceeds to S152 which will be described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, it means that it is in the time saving state. The total time saving number counter as counting means is updated by subtracting -1 (S143).

The total time reduction counter to be subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time reduction state after the 4R design time reduction jackpot in the jackpot end processing of FIG. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big hit, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, it is subtracted and updated each time the variation display as a result of the display of the error is executed. The total number of time saving counter is used to determine both whether or not the conditions for ending the first time saving state are satisfied and whether or not the conditions for ending the second time saving state are satisfied.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol based on whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" (S145). At S145, when it is time to end the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148, which will be described later. On the other hand, at S145, when it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S146). The special figure 2 time-saving number counter that is subtracted and updated in S146 is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state after the end of the big hit game. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time reduction state in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time reduction state be done. The special figure 2 time reduction number counter is subtracted and updated each time the variable display that results in the display result that the second special symbol is lost is executed by S146.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter becomes "0", when one of the end conditions of the first time saving state is established, or one of the end conditions of the second time saving state is established Since it is time, it progresses to S149 mentioned later in order to end the 1st time-saving state or the 2nd time-saving state in execution. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter is not "0", to check whether one other end condition of the end condition of the first time saving state is satisfied Then, the process proceeds to S148.

In S148, based on the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the end condition of the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed is satisfied Then, it is checked whether or not the count value of the total time saving number counter updated by subtraction in S143 has become "0" (S148). In S148, when the count value of the total time saving counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152 which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

S149 and S150 are the first time saving state and the second time saving state, respectively. Executed to end the first time saving state or second time saving state being executed when it is determined that the total number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the number of times of the end condition. .

In S149, the time saving flag that has been set is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set time reduction number counter is reset (S150). Then, when the time saving condition is completed based on the variable display times in the time saving state, processing for transmitting the normal state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151), and the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special design process shifts to special design normal processing.

In such a special symbol stop process, by S142 to S151, when in the first time saving state, execution of the second special symbol one time loss fluctuation display, and a total of 5 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When either of the execution of the time difference fluctuation display is established, the process of terminating the first time saving state is performed. Further, according to S142 to S151, when the second time-saving state, the execution of the second special symbol 7 times of loss variation display, and the execution of the loss variation display of a total of 11 times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When one of the conditions is established, a process for terminating the second time saving state is performed.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot ending process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big winning opening control timer that was set before the jackpot ending process was executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed (S162). If it has not passed, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has passed, in the current jackpot game state, based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55, it is confirmed whether or not the jackpot type to end is the 8R time-saving jackpot ( S163).

When the type of the jackpot ended by S163 is the pattern 4R time saving jackpot, in order to control to the first time saving state, as the end condition of the first time saving state, "1" (second special The data of "5" (corresponding to the total fluctuation display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern) is set in the total time reduction counter (S165). ). Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

When the type of the jackpot to be terminated by S163 is not the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, it is when the type of the jackpot to be terminated is a jackpot type other than the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot, and in order to control to the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is performed. As an end condition, set the data of "7" (corresponding to one time fluctuation display of the second special symbol) to the special figure 2 time saving number counter (S167), "11" to the total time saving number counter (first special symbol and 11 times of total fluctuation display of the second special symbol) data is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

In S170, in order to control to the 1st time saving state or the 2nd time saving state, a time saving flag is set (S170). When controlling to the 1st time saving state, a 1st time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to a 2nd time saving state, a 2nd time saving flag is set. Then, according to the end of the jackpot game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S171), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special design process shifts to special design normal processing.

As a result, after the big win game state of the pattern 4R time-saving big win is completed, the state is controlled to the first time-saving state, and after the big win game state of the big win type other than the pattern 4R time-saving big win is completed, it is controlled to the second time-saving state. Then, the end conditions for each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state are defined individually by the number of fluctuation display times of only the second special design and the total number of fluctuation display opening times of the first special design and the second special design. be.

In such a jackpot ending process, by S164 and S165, after the jackpot game state of the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot is finished, the second special pattern is displayed once, and the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed. The setting of controlling to the first time saving state is performed until either of the execution of the deviation fluctuation display a total of five times is established. In addition, through S167 and S168, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot type other than the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot, execution of the second special symbol seven times of losing variation display, and a total of 11 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A setting is made to control to the second time saving state until either of the execution of the time difference fluctuation display is established.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S308). In the small win opening preprocessing, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the small win opening mode set in S140 of FIG. The opening operation of the mouth is started (S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small-hit start designation command indicating that a small-hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Next, the CPU 56 sets a V judging winning number counter as counting means in order to use the number of winnings to the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small win as a termination condition of the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V judgment winning number counter is set to "10", and the setting for down-counting the V winning number is performed. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning open process (S309) (S413).

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the small hit opening process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit open process, the CPU 56 updates the small hit open control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435, which will be described later, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V judgment prize winning number counter for counting the number of V winning prizes is "0" (S431). The V determination winning ball counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 15, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V judgment winning number counter is not "0" at S430, it is confirmed whether the small hit opening control timer set at S140 of FIG. 13 has timed out (timer value = 0). (S432).

When the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the small hit opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled corresponding to the clock value of the small winning opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small hit set in S140 of FIG. , the movable portion 872 is moved to the open state, and processing for opening and closing the operation opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is performed (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether or not the V prize generated by the game ball entering from the V prize opening into the V prize area 870 which is in the open state inside the V judgment prize winning device 87 is detected, the V prize is detected. It is determined whether or not the switch 87a is on (S434). When it is on in S434, it means that V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning balls have been detected, and can recognize the number of V winning balls. Next, the opening/closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first game ball entering the V determination winning device 87 wins the V, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game entering the V determination winning device 87 All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V judgment winning switch 15b.

On the other hand, when it is not turned on in S434, it means that V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V judgment winning switch 15b is turned on (S438). When it is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and when it is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V judgment winning ball counter set to "10" by S413 of FIG. 15 is counted down to "-1" (S439), and processing for transmitting a V judgment winning ball detection designation command. (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball has entered the judgment winning device 87 after the detection of the V winning ball, and enters the judgment winning device 87. It is possible to recognize the number of game balls played.

When the count value of the V judgment winning prize number counter is "0" in S431, it means that the opening end condition of the small prize is satisfied because the number of V winning prizes of the small prize reaches the upper limit value, and When the small-hit open control timer times out in S432, it is when the small-hit opening end condition is established due to the end of the small-hit open control. At these times, the CPU 56 operates the movable portion 872 to the closed state by controlling the solenoid 22 to close the operation opening of the V judgment prize winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the mode of opening the small win, the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter becomes ``0''. The V judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit open control timer times out, the V judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small hit open control in the small hit open mode.

Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning valid period after closing the V judgment winning device 87 is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small winning end process ( S310) is updated (S443), and the process ends. As a result, the timing of the specific period, which is the V winning valid period after the closing of the V judgment winning device 87, is started. By setting the specific period as the V winning valid period in this way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning area for some reason later than the normal passing time, the game ball can be detected. In addition, since a specific period is set, even if there is a person who illegally attempts to win a prize in the V winning area, it is only detected during that period, so fraud can be prevented.

FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 56 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small winning has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V win flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the notification to promote hitting to the right, which will be described later, the game ball is allowed to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. , and the game ball that has entered the V judgment winning device 87 always V wins in the V winning area 870, so that the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, a big hit flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to a big win game state.

Next, the CPU 56 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it has been determined that the jackpot will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time-saving flags (the first time-saving flag and the second time-saving flag set in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14) set at that time are once reset (S451).

Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot game state is started. Next, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the effect display device 9) is set to the big winning hole control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the time (the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, data of the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (S455) to a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305), and the process is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S457), and the process is terminated. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG.

When power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (S701). ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). For example, in the command analysis process, when a variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103 . Also, in the command analysis process, when a display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103 . In addition, when various production control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set. Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process processing, in order to perform various effects such as effects corresponding to the variable display of special symbols on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, among the processes according to the control state, A process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected to execute production control.

Next, a random number update process is executed to update the count value of a counter for generating various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting and determining various effects (S706). After that, the process proceeds to S702.

In the performance control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the performance pattern is started, and when the variation display time specified by the variation pattern command elapses, or when the pattern confirmation designation command is received. When it does, stop the variable display of the production pattern. By executing such a production control main process, the production control microcomputer 100 is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, and according to the received production control command, the production display device 9, various lamps, and , by controlling the effect device such as the speaker 27, various effect control corresponding to the game state is performed.

In addition, in the production control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variable display of the production pattern is started, and when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the variable display of the production pattern is stopped. good too. The variation pattern command is a command consisting of data capable of specifying the information necessary for designating the variation display mode such as the length of variation time and the variation display result. Variation display is controlled so as to be executed at a variation time corresponding to each variation pattern command. In addition, the stop pattern when executing the performance control for variably displaying the performance symbols is determined based on the judgment as to whether it is a loss or a big hit based on the display result specifying command.

FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the processes of S500 and S501, and then performs one of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed, but is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol. The control related to the produced effect and the control related to the effect synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process. In addition, in the effect control process processing, in a mode that can be displayed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, the effect corresponding to (synchronized with) the variable display of the normal symbol is also executed.

Ball hitting promotion effect processing (S500): Based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game state is confirmed, and a ball hitting promotion effect is executed according to the game state. The ball-hitting promotion effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball is promoted to hit at least one of the first path (left-handed path) and the second path (right-handed path) in the game area 7 . Specifically, the hitting-ball promotion effect includes a right-hand hitting promotion notification effect for notifying that the hitting of the game ball into the second path (right-hand hitting path) is promoted. It may include a notification effect and a left-handed promotion notification effect that provides a notification to promote the hitting of the game ball into the first path (left-handed path).

For example, in a specific display area of the effect display device, the effect of the right-handed promotion notification is to continuously display a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed", along with a right-pointing arrow image. It is done by

In this embodiment, the hitting of the game ball is basically left-handed, and as the hitting promotion effect, the second route (right Hitting the game ball (right hitting path) is promoted, and conversely, based on the state where the right hitting promotion notification is not executed, hitting the game ball (left hitting path) to the first path (left hitting path) A description will be given of an example of effect control that promotes hitting).

As the hitting promotion effect, effect control may be performed to selectively use both left-hand hitting promotion information and right-hand hitting promotion information according to the game state. Further, as the hitting promotion effect, effect control may be performed to selectively use both left-hand hitting promotion information and right-hand hitting promotion information according to the game state.

Prefetching process (S501): This is a process of storing the pending memory information (holding information) corresponding to the pending memory information possessed by the game control microcomputer 560 and making the pending memory information usable for the prefetching effect. The look-ahead effect is the contents of the variable display of the special design based on the reservation information by pre-reading the reservation memory information before the turn of the special design variation display (design variation) based on the reservation memory information arrives. is determined, and a performance technique such as giving an advance notice of how the future variable display of the special pattern will be at an earlier stage. For example, when the pending memory information indicates that a small win or a big win in symbols, a notice effect (see FIG. 21) called continuous pending notification effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the pending storage information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as "target pending storage information". Further, the pending display based on the pending information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as "target pending display".

Variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the production start processing at the time of fluctuation (S801).

Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that the effect at the time of variation, which is an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, a performance pattern for performance at the time of variation is selected, and time measurement of a performance time timer for measuring performance time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during production at the time of fluctuation (S802).

Effect symbol fluctuating process (S802): Controls the switching timing of each state constituting the effect pattern, and monitors whether or not the effect time measured by the effect time timer has ended. Then, the value of the performance control process flag corresponds to the performance stop processing at the time of fluctuation (S803) in order to end the performance at the time of fluctuation based on the completion of the performance time or the reception of the pattern confirmation designation command. value.

Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Control is performed to stop the effect at the time of variation and display the effect result corresponding to the variable display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

Big win display processing (S804): When a big win (first big win or second big win) occurs, control such as a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big win display for notifying the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 9 is performed. Control the display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round process (S805).

In-round processing (S805): Performs display control during the big hit round. Then, when the round end condition is met, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (S807).

Post-round processing (S806): Performs display control between big hit rounds. Then, when the round start condition is established, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round process (S805).

Big win end effect processing (S807): The effect display device 9 performs display control for informing the player that the big win game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

Small win display processing (S808): When a small win occurs, a fanfare effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) as an effect such as a small win display for notifying the occurrence of a small win on the effect display device 9. Display control such as control is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S809).

Processing during small hit opening (S809): In the small hit, various effects are controlled while the V judgment winning device 87 is open. Then, when the V judgment winning device 87 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect processing (S810).

Small win end effect processing (S810): The effect display device 9 performs effect control for informing the player that the small win game state has ended. In addition, in a small winning game state, V winning of a game ball is detected by a V winning prize switch 87a, and when it is determined that V winning has occurred, V winning presentation control is performed to inform that V winning has occurred. When V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big winning display processing (S804) in order to shift to the big winning game state. On the other hand, when the V prize is not generated in the small winning game state, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting processing (S800) since the game is not shifted to the big winning game state.

In the production control process, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled by the above-described processes, the production at the time of fluctuation corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is started, and the production result corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbols is produced. Is displayed. For example, the effect control CPU 101 recognizes the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variable display to be executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result specification command, and performs the effect of the effect at the time of variation. determine the outcome. In addition, in the effect control process processing, the execution status of the effect control process is confirmed by S500, and the hitting promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

The pachinko game machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of hitting ball promotion effects including high base state right hitting promotion information, small hit right hitting promotion information, and big winning right hitting promotion information. The high-base state right-hand hitting promotion notification is a hitting-ball promotion effect for making the game ball aim to enter the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning port 14) by hitting right in the high base state. be. The small-hit right-handed promotion notification is a hitting-ball promotion effect for making the game ball aim to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 (V-winning area) by hitting right in the small-hit game state. The big-hit right-handed promotion notification is a hitting-ball promotion effect for making the game ball aim to enter the big-hit variable winning ball device 20 (big-winning prize opening) by hitting right in the big-hitting game state.

The high-base state right-handed promotion notification, the small-hit right-handed promotion notification, and the big-hit right-handed promotion notification include a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed", along with a right-pointing arrow image. It may be performed using the same image that is continuously displayed. In other words, even if it is displayed in a state in which it is impossible to specify which type of right-handed promotional notification corresponds to the promotional notification in the high base state, the promotional notification for the small win, or the promotional notification for the big win. good. Right-handed promotion notification is an image that continuously displays a character image that suggests and promotes right-handed hitting, such as "right-handed", along with a right-pointing arrow image. may be displayed using different images, such as a yellow image for the small hit right-hand promotion notification and a red image for the big hit right-hand promotion notice. In this embodiment, the high base state right-handed promotion notification is displayed in a blue image, the small-hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed in a yellow image, and the big-hit right-handed promotion notification is displayed in a red image. explain. Also, the size of the image used for the effect may be changed according to the type of the hitting promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the effect may be changed according to the degree of advantage for the player. As an example, a small-sized image is used for the small-hit right-handed promotion notification, a medium-sized image is used for the high-base-right-handed promotion notification, and a large-sized image is used for the big-hit right-handed promotion notification. You may make it promote alerting|reporting using the image of. As for the high-base state right-handed promotion notification, a large-sized image may be used for the promotional notice, as in the big-hit right-handed promotion notice.

Next, as an example of the effect during the big win game state displayed on the effect display device 9 when the "big win in the pattern" or the "big win via the small win" is achieved based on the winning to the second start winning port 14, The V-combo effect (VCOMBO effect) will be explained. The V-combo effect is performed during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds in the big win game state when a "big win in the pattern" or a "big win via a small win" is achieved based on the winning in the second starting prize opening 14. , This is an effect in which the number of payouts of prize balls (discharged balls) in the jackpot game state is notified in a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect in which the number of payouts of prize balls is divided into a plurality of times and notified in stages.

FIG. 20 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the round suggestion effect. In FIG. 20, an example of the round suggestive effect is shown according to the passage of time, and images having little relation to the round suggestive effect are omitted. The round suggesting effect is a round in the big win game state executed via the end of the small win according to the display image of the effect display device 9 when it is determined that the big win will be achieved by the occurrence of the V prize in the small win game state. It is a production that suggests numbers.

FIGS. 20A to 20E show an example of a round suggestion effect. In the small winning game state, the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to be open, and the game ball can enter the V determination winning device 87.例文帳に追加When a V winning occurs in such a state, a V-shaped V winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 20(A). As a result, a V winning notification indicating that a winning has occurred is made. The display of the V winning image 94 continues until the V judgment winning device 87 is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, when the V winning image 94 is displayed in response to the occurrence of the V winning, the aura image 95 (95A to 95E) imitating the aura is displayed as the V winning. The image 94 is displayed in an effect image-like display mode that clings to the periphery of the image 94 . As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the aura image is composed of a plurality of colors such as an aura image white 95A, an aura image blue 95B, an aura image green 95C, an aura image red 95D, or an aura image rainbow 95E. Displayed in the selected color. In the drawing, the color of the aura image 95 is indicated by parenthesized colored characters (the colored characters are not actually displayed, but may be displayed). As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the color of the aura image 95 can be changed and displayed in a plurality of predetermined stages such as white→blue→green→red→rainbow during the small winning game. The color of the aura image 95 can be changed step by step according to the number of winnings to the V judgment winning device 87 .

The color of the aura image 95 may or may not change from the initially displayed color during the small winning game. The aura image 95 can suggest the degree of expectation of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state in color. A correspondence relationship of "white<blue<green<red<rainbow" is determined in advance for the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation for the number of rounds. As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation for a large number of rounds in the jackpot game state from the color of the aura image 95 . For example, the player can recognize that the number of rounds is more likely to increase when the aura image red 95D is displayed than when the aura image blue 95B is displayed.

After the game media have entered the specific area by executing the round number suggesting effect as shown in FIG. Since the performance mode of the predetermined performance such as the performance can be changed, the progress of the game is not slowed down, and the amusement of the game can be improved by the performance.

In addition, since the round number suggesting effect by the V winning aura image 95 is executed in relation to the execution of the effect notifying the V winning by the display of the V winning image 94, the interest of the game is further improved by the effect. be able to.

In addition, since the effect mode (color) of the round number suggesting effect by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87, the round number suggesting effect and the V A player can be made to pay attention to the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.例文帳に追加

In addition, the effect mode (color) of the round number suggesting effect by the V winning aura image 95 depends on the number of rounds of the big win game state (advantage of the number of rounds) controlled based on the V winning in the small win game state. Since the number of rounds of the big win can be changed step by step, the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big win, so that the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

FIG. 21 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing the effect image of the continuous suspension notification effect. FIG. 22 is a timing chart of the continuous holding notification effect. With reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the continuous holding notification effect as a special effect will be described. In FIG. 21, (A) to (D) show an example of continuous holding notification effects over time. FIG. 22 shows the effect control timing during the period from the start of the small winning game state to the beginning of the big winning game state based on the V winning.

Suspended series means that, in the suspended storage information that exists when a big win occurs, there is suspended storage information that will become a big win in the future, and it exists after the big win game state of the big win and before the big win occurs. Continuation within the range of retained stored information in which the next big win occurs continuously within the range of retained stored information that existed at the time of the occurrence of the big win, such as the next big win occurring within the range of the retained stored information It refers to a big hit (reservation inside Renso). Since the small win becomes the big win via the small win based on the occurrence of the V prize, the reserved storage information of the small win is the reserved storage information that will become the big win in the future.

The holding group in this embodiment judges the inside of the holding storage information of the second holding storage information when the jackpot is achieved in the time saving state (high base state). When the second reserved storage information exists, the second reserved storage information is preferentially used for variable display over the first reserved storage information, so in the time saving state (high base state), the reserved storage information of the second reserved storage information If there is reserved memory information of small hits or big wins in the game, continuous big wins can occur, so these reserved memory information are judged to be memory information of reserved series.

After the small winning game state is started as shown in FIG. 22, when the V winning occurs during the execution of the effect of the processing during opening (S809) of FIG. 19, as shown in FIGS. , the effect display device 9 displays a V-shaped V winning image 94 for a relatively short predetermined period. As a result, a V prize is notified to indicate that a V prize has been won. When the holding continuous effect is executed, the following effects are executed over the small winning game state and the big winning game state.

During the small winning game state, when a predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the V winning, as shown in FIGS. A blackout display that looks like it is not open is executed as a basic effect by the open process (S809) and the small win end process (S810) of FIG. Instead of the effect, it is continuously executed until the end of the small winning game state (first processing of the reservation continuous notification effect). As the blackout display, it is possible to change the visibility of a predetermined image to a state in which the visibility of a predetermined image is less visible than in the standard state, or to surprise the player. An image of a predetermined color such as translucent black is superimposed on the front side of the normally displayed effect image (effect pattern, character, background image, etc.) instead of darkening to a single color image. By doing so, the brightness of the image on the entire display screen may be lowered to make the image darker overall, or to give the player a special feeling.

After the end of the small-hit game state, the fanfare effect at the start of the big win executed as a basic effect by the big-hit display process (S804) of FIG. (indicated by ), continuous holding notification as shown in FIG. 21(C) or (D) and FIG. 22 is executed (second process of continuous holding notification effect). Concretely, when the total of the reserved memory information which becomes a specific symbol jackpot and the reserved memory information which becomes a specific small hit is three in the reserved memory information, "+3 BONUS" as shown in FIG. 21(C). is displayed, the continuous holding notification is performed. When the total of the reserved memory information for a specific pattern jackpot and the reserved memory information for a specific small hit is four in the reserved memory information, the characters "+4 BONUS" are displayed as shown in FIG. 21(D). By doing so, continuous hold notification is performed. Also, although not shown, if the total of the reserved memory information for a specific pattern big hit and the reserved memory information for a specific small hit is two in the reserved memory information, the character "+2 BONUS" is displayed. By doing so, continuous hold notification is performed. In this manner, in the continuous holding notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of pieces of holding memory information that can be a big hit in the holding memory information after the end of the big win game state, and the number is notified.

In this way, the number of reserved memory information determined to be a symbol big hit and the number of reserved memory information determined to be a small win are identifiably reported in the continuous retention notification effect, which is advantageous to the player. By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of pieces of information, the attraction of the game can be further enhanced by the effect.

As shown in FIG. 22, such a continuous notification of holding is executed until a specific period of time at the beginning of the start of the big win game state, such as before the start of the first round of the big win game. After the continuous pending notification is executed, the process (S805) during the round of FIG. 19 starts the first round effect of the jackpot game state as shown in FIG. 21(E) and FIG. 22, for example. In this way, the holding continuous notification effect is executed across the small winning game state and the big winning game state.

The reason why the blackout display is executed when the consecutive holding notification effect is executed is as follows. When the continuous pending notification effect is executed, the round number suggesting effect shown in FIG. 20 is not executed. When using the V-judgment prize-winning device 87 of the deceleration structure described above, since the game ball slowly flows down the passage on the V-judgment prize-winning device 87, a total of 10 At what point in the opening times V winning occurs, and at what point the 10th game ball of the upper limit number, which is the condition for ending the open state, enters the V judgment winning device 87 Variation occurs for each occurrence of a small hit. As a result, the timing at which the small-hit game state ends varies for each occurrence of the small-hit. When executing an effect in which the effect changes irregularly according to the number of game balls entering the V-judgment winning device 87, such as the effect indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. It doesn't make a good performance. However, as an effect display during the period from the start of the small win game state to the end of the small win game state, for example, the ending is reached after a certain period of time has passed. If it is assumed that a certain performance or the like will be executed, there is a risk that the performance will give the player a sense of incompatibility, such as a different performance state at the end of each small win. It becomes difficult to make adjustments to uniform the performance state at the end of each small win. Therefore, in order to execute a small winning game effect that does not give the player a sense of discomfort, a blackout display effect is executed in which the content of the effect does not change. That is, the blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for not giving the player a sense of discomfort even if the performance period of the small winning game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to suitably execute the holding continuous notification effect for adjustment of the effect period or the like.

Based on the inclusion of at least one of the reserved memory information determined to result in a big winning pattern and the reserved memory information determined to result in a small winning when a V winning occurs in a small winning game state. In addition, since it is possible to execute the holding continuous notification effect, the attraction of the game can be improved by the effect.

In addition, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the V winning notification of FIG. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect when is generated.

In addition, when a V prize is generated in the small winning game state, at least one of the reserved memory information determined to result in a big winning pattern or the reserved memory information determined to result in a small winning is included. Based on , it is possible to execute the holding continuous notification effect, so that the effect can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the holding continuous notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of holding storage information that can be a big hit in the holding storage information after the end of the big win game state, and the number is reported. As a result, the player can specifically recognize the number of reserved stored information that is advantageous to the player, so that the attraction of the game can be further enhanced by the effect.

Furthermore, in the pending continuous notification effect, for example, the total number of pending storage information that can be a big hit in the pending storage information, such as "+3 BONUS" in FIG. 21(C) and "+4 BONUS" in FIG. 21(D) Depending on the effect mode of the special effect to be executed when the number is less than a predetermined number (three, etc.) and when the number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (four, etc.), in which effect mode the continuous notification effect of holding is executed. can draw the player's attention to

In addition, in the pending continuous notification effect of FIG. 21, an example of executing the blackout display after executing the V winning notification for a short period of time is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout display may be executed without notifying the V prize. Further, when executing the holding continuous notification effect, for example, other images such as a predetermined still image or a moving image of executing repeated actions for a short period of time may be displayed without executing the blackout display. Also, the blackout display period may be a fixed period. The holding continuous notification effect may be executed until during the big win round effect after the end of the small winning game state. In the case where the suspension continuous notification effect is executed until during the performance of the round of the big win, if the blackout display period is set to a fixed time, the blackout display for the fixed period is executed from the time of V winning, so the blackout of the period is performed. The out display period may be a fixed period, or the end time of the blackout display may be indeterminate until during the round performance of the big win. Further, the holding continuous notification effect may be executed at the time of the V winning, or may be executed during the opening period of the V judgment winning device 87 after the V winning.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a data table used when selecting an effect mode of the round number suggesting effect. FIG. 23A shows a V aura color change effect pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect patterns for changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 in the round number suggesting effect. FIG. 23B shows a V aura color change effect pattern selection table used for selecting an effect pattern for changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 in the number-of-rounds suggestion effect.

In FIG. 23(A), the number of winning prizes (1 to 10, etc.) to the V judgment winning device 87 during the small hit game state is shown in each effect pattern of the 1st pattern to the 8th pattern. ), the color of the V winning aura image 95 is set corresponding to each. For example, in the sixth pattern, the 1st and 2nd pieces are white, the 3rd and 6th pieces are blue, the 7th and 8th pieces are green, and the 9th and 10th pieces are red. Data is set. The number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87 is the total value of game balls detected by the V determination winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a. Incidentally, the number of winning prizes to the V judgment prize winning device 87 may be the value of the game balls detected by the V judgment discharge switch 15b.

The magnitude of the expected degree of the number of rounds is predetermined as follows: white < blue < green < red < rainbow. A color change pattern is set such that the color can change in the order of green→red. Rainbow colors are colors that contain other colors such as blue, green, and red. In this way, the player's sense of anticipation is heightened during the opening of the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state by means of the production pattern that changes to a color with a higher degree of expectation for the number of rounds as the number of winning prizes increases. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the opening control is slow.

The eighth pattern differs from the other production patterns in that rainbow colors are set for all of the 1st to 10th patterns, and the colors do not change and are fixed to the rainbow colors. This is because the rainbow color is used as a special color that suggests that the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via the jackpot has been confirmed. As an effect pattern suggesting that the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via a small hit has been confirmed, for example, an effect pattern in which colors can change in the order of white→blue→green→red→rainbow may be used. good.

FIG. 23(B) shows the correspondence relationship between the types of small wins via big wins and the first to eighth patterns of FIG. 23(A). In FIG. 23 (B), for each of the 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, the 9 (8) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R short-time jackpot via the small hit, for effect control As one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, a total of 100 numerical values of the random number SR2 (numerical range of 0 to 99) for selecting the V-combo effect pattern are allocated to each of the corresponding first to eighth patterns. It is

In FIG. 23 (B), in response to the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the number of rounds, "white < blue < green < red < rainbow", "5 (4) R short-time big hit <small hit via small hit Via 9 (8) R time reduction jackpot < small hit via 16 (15) R time reduction jackpot”, so that the selection rate of the production pattern with a high round number expectation for the final 10th color will be high is set with data. In FIG. 23(B), the eighth pattern is set to be selectable only at the time of the 16 (15) R time-saving big hit via the small hit. As a result, when the round number suggesting effect is executed in the eighth pattern (all of the first to tenth pieces are rainbow colors), the player is informed that the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot via the small prize has been confirmed. It is possible to suggest Note that the eighth pattern may be selectable for jackpots other than the small hit via 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a holding continuous notification effect presence/absence determination table. A holding continuous notification effect presence/absence determination table is stored in the ROM 102 .

In the holding consecutive notification effect presence/absence determination table of FIG. 24, when the total number of holding consecutive consecutive numbers of the pattern 15R short time jackpot and the 16 (15) R time short jackpot via the small win is 0 to 4 respectively, the effect control is performed. A total of 150 numerical values of the random number SR2 (numerical value range of 0 to 149) for determining whether or not to perform continuous notification on hold as one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100 are “executed (executed)” and “not executed”. (Do not execute)”.

In this way, the pending continuous notification effect can be executed as a target with the pending storage information that can be a big win of opening the big winning opening 15 times. It should be noted that the continuous pending notification effect may be made executable for other types of pending stored information that can be a big hit. In the holding continuous notification effect presence/absence determination table, data is set so that when there is 0 or 1 object holding storage information, "executed" is not determined, and only "no execution" is determined. It is

In addition, in the holding continuous notification effect presence/absence determination table, data is set so that "execution existence" can be determined when the total of the target holding storage information is two or more. The data is set such that the greater the number of pieces of pending storage information, the higher the rate at which "executed" is determined. As a result, according to the number of holding memory information that can be a big hit, such as the pattern 15R short time big win and the 16 (15)R time short big win via the small win, the number of rounds that is advantageous to the player, the continuous notification effect of holding is executed. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how many times the big win with the number of advantageous rounds will be executed when the holding continuous notification effect is executed.

Furthermore, when the continuous holding notification performance is executed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of holding storage information that can be a big hit, so that the performance can further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the holding consecutive notification effect presence/absence determination table, when the total number of holding consecutive numbers of the symbol 15R short time jackpot and the 16 (15) R short time jackpot via the small hit is two or more among the big hit types, the holding consecutive notification effect is performed. The data is set to run. As a result, the player is informed that a plurality of pieces of holding memory information that can be a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the jackpot types are stored when the reservation continuous notification performance is executed. can be recognized, the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

In addition, as a target for execution of the continuous continuous notification performance, the retention memory information that can be a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds such as the 15R short time jackpot and the 16 (15) short time big win of the pattern is used. When the game is executed, the player naturally has a high degree of expectation for a big winning game state in which the big winning port is opened 15 times, which is most advantageous to the player, so that the attraction of the game can be improved by the performance.

Next, a description will be given of a holding series/round number suggesting effect selection process for determining whether or not to execute the holding series notification effect and the round number suggesting effect and selecting the type of effect. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing a holding series/number of rounds suggestion effect selection process.

25 is included in the process of setting various effects in the effect symbol variation start process (S801 in FIG. 19). In the pending series/round number suggestion effect selection process, first, whether or not the variation display result of the variation display to be executed this time is the small hit display result is determined based on the display result designation command received at the time of this variation (display The result may be determined based on an identifiable variation pattern command) (S851). The received display result specifying command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103 . The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103, and determines whether or not the small hit display result is stored depending on whether or not a command designating the small hit display result is stored in the area indicating the variable display to be executed this time. judge.

When it is not a small hit display result by S851, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is a small hit display result by S851, the current second pending storage information (holding storage information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14) stored in the look-ahead process (S501) of FIG. ) is acquired (S852). Then, based on the acquired second pending memory information, the presence or absence of the pending memory information to be the symbol jackpot (symbol 15R short-time jackpot) to be the target of the pending continuous notification effect is confirmed (S853), and the target of the pending continuous notification effect. (S854). Next, SR2 is extracted, and based on the confirmation information in S853 and S854, the holding continuous notification effect presence/absence determination table is used, and the holding continuous notification effect is executed based on the holding storage information in the current second holding storage information. It determines whether or not to execute (whether or not to execute) (S855).

In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the right-handed promotion notification, V winning occurs with a probability of approximately 100%, and control is made to the big winning game state. Therefore, the holding memory information that becomes a small hit is also determined as the holding memory information that becomes a holding group together with the holding memory information that becomes a big hit.

When it is determined in S855 to execute the holding continuous notification effect, the holding continuous notification effect information (for example, the notification target holding number of runs, presence/absence of execution of suspension run notification effect, etc.) are stored in a predetermined effect data storage area (S857), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is decided in S855 not to execute the holding continuous notification effect, it is decided to execute the round suggestion effect (aura image color change effect) (S858). Next, based on the display result designation command confirmed in S851, the type of small hit via big hit is confirmed, SR3 is extracted, and execution is performed using the V aura color change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 23 (B). A production pattern for the round suggestion production is selected and determined (S859). Then, the effect pattern data stored in the V aura color change effect pattern table in FIG. Effect information (for example, number-of-rounds suggesting effect pattern, presence or absence of number-of-rounds suggesting effect, etc.) is stored in a specific effect data storage area (S860), and the process ends.

When it is decided to execute the continuous suspension notification effect when the variation display results in the small win display result, the continuous suspension notification effect is executed based on the data stored in S857. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the holding continuous notification effect when the variable display results in the small win display result, the round number suggesting effect is executed based on the data stored in S860. In the case of a pachinko game machine that does not have a continuous holding notification effect, S858 may be executed after S855.

It should be noted that the number of rounds suggesting effect may be executed also when the continuous holding notification effect is executed. In addition, the round number suggesting effect is not always executed when the continuous pending notification effect is not executed, but when the continuous pending notification effect is not executed, it is determined by a predetermined lottery whether the round number suggesting effect is executed or not. You may Further, whether or not to execute the number of rounds suggestion performance may be determined by a predetermined lottery, and when it is decided to execute the number of rounds suggestion performance, the holding continuous notification performance may not be executed. In this way, either the continuous holding notification effect or the number of rounds suggesting effect may be executed with priority, or both may be executed without prioritizing either one.

Next, the round number suggesting effect processing for executing the above-described round number suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the number-of-rounds suggestion rendering process. The number-of-rounds suggestion effect process of FIG. 26 is configured and executed as a part of the process during opening of the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

In the round number suggesting effect processing, first, the round number suggesting effect information (the round number suggesting effect pattern, whether or not the round number suggesting effect is executed, etc.) stored in S860 of FIG. 25 is obtained (S840). Next, based on the information on whether or not to execute the round number suggesting effect acquired in S840, it is confirmed whether or not the execution of the round number suggesting effect has been determined (S841). If it is not determined in S841 to execute the round number suggesting effect, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is decided in S841 to execute the round number suggesting effect, it is the time of receiving the V specific winning ball detection designation command output when the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 is detected. (S842).

If it is not time to receive a command in S842, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to receive a command in S842, the winning number counter as counting means for counting game balls that have entered the V judgment winning device 87 is updated by +1 (S843). Then, the aura image 95 is displayed in a color corresponding to the number counted by the updated winning number counter based on the effect pattern of the round number suggesting effect acquired in S840 (S843). By displaying the aura image 95 in the color corresponding to the number in S843, the number-of-rounds suggesting effect is executed in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed according to the number of game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87. It will happen. The V winning image 94 is started to be displayed based on the reception of the V winning designating command in the processing during opening of the small winning effect (S809). Since the detection designation command is received, the aura image 95 corresponding to the V winning image 94 is displayed in the color determined by S844 immediately after the occurrence of the V winning through S843. As a result, the number-of-rounds suggesting effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed as shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E is executed.

Next, a description will be given of the first processing of the holding continuous notification effect for executing the above-described holding continuous notification effect during the small winning game. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the first processing of continuous on-hold notification effect. 27 is constructed and executed as part of the process during opening of the small hit effect (S809 in FIG. 19).

In the first continuous holding notification effect process, first, the continuous holding notification effect information (the number of informing targets, whether or not to execute the continuous holding notification effect, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is obtained (S861). Next, based on the information on whether or not to execute the continuous suspension notification effect acquired in S861, it is confirmed whether or not the execution of the continuous suspension notification effect has been determined (S862). If it is determined in S862 that the execution of the continuous notification effect of holding is not made, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is decided in S862 to execute the suspension continuous notification effect, the V winning ball transmitted to the V winning area 870 of the V judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V winning switch 87a. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving the detection designation command (S863).

If it is determined in S863 that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the V winning detection designation command was received, the process is terminated. On the other hand, at S863, when the predetermined period of time has passed since the V winning detection designation command was received, based on the information regarding the number of reserved sets to be notified acquired at S861, the processing during opening of the small winning effect (S809) and the small winning. The blackout display is started (S864) until the termination process (S810) is completed, and the process is terminated. As a result, the blackout display as shown in FIG. 21(B) is executed until the end of the small winning game.

Next, a description will be given of the second processing of the continuous suspension notification effect which is executed during the big win display. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the second processing of continuous on-hold notification effect. The second pending continuous notification effect process of FIG. 28 is configured and executed as part of the big win display process (S804 of FIG. 19) of the big win effect.

In the second continuous holding notification effect process, first, the continuous holding notification effect information (the number of informing targets, whether or not to execute the continuous holding notification effect, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is obtained (S871). Next, based on the information on whether or not to execute the continuous suspension notification effect acquired in S871, it is confirmed whether or not the execution of the continuous suspension notification effect has been determined (S872). If it is determined in S872 that the execution of the continuous notification effect of holding is not made, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is decided in S872 to execute the continuous holding notification effect, +2 BONUS (in the case of two target ), +3 BONUS (when the number of target pending runs is 3), or +4 BONUS (when the number of target pending runs is 4) (S873). Then, in the suspension continuous notification mode selected in S873, execution of the suspension continuous notification to be executed over a predetermined period during the big win display effect period is started. As a result, for example, continuous on-hold notification as shown in FIGS. 21(C) and (D) is executed.

[Modified example in which holding continuous notification effect is performed by V winning image aura color]
Next, a modification will be described in which a holding continuous notification effect is performed using the V winning image aura color. FIG. 21 shows an example in which the holding continuous notification effect is executed by character information such as "+3 BONUS". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an aura image 95 whose color can be changed as shown in FIG.

As for the pending continuous notification effect using the aura image 95, the aura image 95 displayed in conjunction with the V winning image 94 is displayed in response to, for example, the increase in the number of game balls that have entered the V judgment winning device 87, as shown in FIG. The color of the aura image 95 may be changed as described above, and the color of the aura image 95 may be changed to a specific color such as rainbow as the above-described suspension continuous notification. In such a holding continuous notification effect, an aura image is displayed based on the fact that the holding memory information includes at least one of the holding memory information for a big hit in the pattern and the holding memory information for a small hit. By making it possible to change the effect mode of a predetermined effect such as to be performed to a specific mode, the continuous holding notification effect may be executed.

If such a holding continuous notification effect is executed, the holding storage information includes at least one of holding storage information for a big hit in the pattern and holding storage information for a small hit. To enable a player to recognize that the reserved memory information includes the reserved memory information for a big win with a pattern or a big win via a small win because the performance mode of the performance for displaying an image can be changed to a specific mode. Thus, the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

[Modified Example of Change in Effect Mode of Hold Continuous Notification Effect]
Next, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, if the total number of holding storage information that will be the big hit in the pattern and the holding storage information that will be the big hit via the small hit is more than one, and only the holding storage information that will be the big hit via the small win is present. An example will be described in which the effect mode of the continuous notification effect on hold differs from that in the case where there are a plurality of them.

Regarding the second holding memory information when the jackpot game state is reached, the first holding series type in which only the holding memory information for the big hit in the pattern exists, the holding memory information for the big hit in the pattern and the small hit (via the small hit There may be a case of the second pending series type in which both holding storage information that becomes a big hit exists, and a case of the third pending series type in which only a small win (big hit via a small win) exists. Such a plurality of types of holding series are all called holding series, and in the case of notifying that there is a holding series as a holding series notification effect, the holding series is notified in a different manner according to the type of holding series. may be executed. For example, in the case of the first pending continuous type, the pending continuous notification is made in katakana such as "+3 bonus", and in the case of the second pending continuous type, the pending continuous notification is made in English characters such as "+3 BONUS", In the case of the third pending series type, the pending series notification may be given in hiragana, such as "+3 bonus". Further, when notifying that there is a reserved series, an image such as characters related to the notification of the reserved series may be displayed in different colors depending on the type of the reserved series. In addition, when notifying that there is a holding run, a different character image is displayed according to the type of holding run (the display may be accompanied by the number of holding runs, or the character image may be displayed alone). You may make it display images, such as a character about. In addition, for each of the first to third pending series types, there are a plurality of types of production modes such as "+3 bonus", production modes such as "+3 BONUS", and "+3 bonus". A performance mode may be selected and determined by lottery from among the performance modes. In that case, the ratio of selection of the effect modes to be executed may be different for each of the types of the first to third types of reserved series.

If such a holding continuous notification effect is executed, it is possible to change the effect mode of the holding continuous notification effect to be executed according to the type of holding continuous, so the holding continuous notification effect can be executed in any effect mode. It is possible to draw a player's attention to a large extent. Further, when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is set to be different for each of the first to third holding series types, the game is determined in which performance mode the holding continuous notification effect is executed. can draw people's attention.

[Modified Example of Restriction Control of Continuous Holding Notification Effect] Next, after executing the continuous holding notification effect for informing that there are a plurality of holding consecutive notification effects, all of the holding storage information targeted for the continuous holding notification effect is consumed. An example of restricting (prohibiting) the execution of the holding continuous notification effect until it is performed will be described.

When there are a plurality of pieces of holding memory information to become a big win in pattern and holding memory information to become a small win (big win via a small win) in the second holding memory information in the state of a big win game, when a holding continuous notification performance is executed. Then, the jackpot game state in which the holding continuous notification effect is executed ends, the big win targeted for the holding continuous notification is executed, and even in the big winning game state, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, the holding continuous notification effect is executed. Whether the informing effect is continuously executed with the holding memory information of the holding group as the notification target in the previous jackpot game state, or the holding group holding memory information based on the newly generated holding group memory information is targeted. It becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is newly executed as , resulting in an unclear presentation.

Therefore, after executing the holding series notification effect for notifying that there are multiple holding series, the execution of the holding series notification production is restricted (prohibited) until all the holding storage information that is the target of the holding series notification production is digested. It suffices to execute the effect control to be performed. After execution of the continuous notification performance of the continuous continuous notification, until the variable display based on all the continuous notification of the continuous notification is executed, the continuous restriction flag of the continuous continuous transmission is set and the new information of the continuous continuous notification is confirmed. Execution of the effect control process may be restricted so as not to execute the process for executing the continuous notification of the holding. In this way, after executing the holding series notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of holding series, the holding series notification production is executed until all the holding storage information targeted for the holding series notification production is consumed. Since the prohibition restricts the new execution of the continuous suspension notification effect, it is possible to clarify which of the suspension storage information is to be notified of the continuous suspension notification effect.

In addition, after execution of the holding series notification effect to notify that there are multiple holding series, the execution of the holding series notification production is restricted (prohibited) until all the holding storage information targeted for the holding series notification production is digested. As an example, the following effects may be executed.

For example, after executing the holding series notification effect to notify that there are multiple holding series, the number of holding series is displayed so that it can be specified by the number of stock images such as icon images, and the holding series notification production is performed. An effect may be provided in which the number of icon images is reduced each time the jackpot game state is completed. Furthermore, when the continuous hold notification is given based on the newly generated hold storage information, such icon images may be increased. In this way, by visualizing the number of informing targets of the holding series so that the player can recognize them, it becomes possible to execute the holding series informing effect that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, if such an effect is executed, after simply executing the holding continuous notification effect, the execution of the holding continuous notification effect is restricted until all the holding storage information that is the target of the holding continuous notification effect is digested. Also, the frequency with which the player recognizes the holding continuous notification effect increases, and an interesting effect can be executed.

[Modified Example of Execution Timing of Hold Continuous Notification Effect]
Next, an example will be described in which the holding continuous notification effect as described above is executed during the V-combo effect (VCOMBO effect). The V-combo effect is performed during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds in the big win game state when a "big win in the pattern" or a "big win via a small win" is achieved based on the winning in the second starting prize opening 14. , This is an effect in which the payout number of prize balls (given value) in the jackpot game state is notified in a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect in which the payout number of prize balls is divided into a plurality of times and notified in stages.

[Example of specific effects during variable display after a big hit]
Next, during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot generated by the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of pending memory information and prefetch determination of the pending memory information Based on the result, a specific effect for performing a big hit look-ahead effect in the reserved storage information will be described.

FIG. 29 is a display screen view of the effect display device 9 showing effect images of a specific effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of specific effects. The specific effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

In FIG. 29, an example of the specific effect is shown according to the passage of time, and images having little relation to the specific effect are omitted. In FIG. 30, in order to show an effect consistent with the effect contents of the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, and to show an overall control image of the specific effect in an easy-to-understand manner, there is a one-time variable display after the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot. An example that is executed by the variable display by the second special symbol is shown. Also, in FIG. 30, four pieces of second reserved memory information are accumulated during the prize-winning performance, and the second reserved memory information up to the third second reserved memory information indicates a big hit via a symbol jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot. information was not included (for example, when the fourth second pending storage information or when the big win via the small win is not included), after the end of the variable display, all the four variable displays accumulated during the winning promotion effect are sequentially executed. there is

29(A) to (O) and FIG. 30 show an example of specific effects. After the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, during the period until the second special symbol is variably displayed once, the variable winning ball device 15 is brought into a high base state by executing electric chew support control. (Electric Chew) prizes are facilitated. Therefore, the winning to the variable winning ball device 15 facilitates accumulation of the second reserved storage information. As for the second reserved storage information, since the winning probability of a small win that can become a big win via a small win is as high as about 1/7, a maximum of four pieces of the second reserved storage information contains a small win. A relatively high frequency may include pending store information that is a bonanza via.

As an effect corresponding to such a game control mechanism, during the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R short-time jackpot, the second reserved memory information is the target of the look-ahead. A specific effect as is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29A, at the start of the specific effect, the effect display device 9 performs a specific effect start effect that displays a specific effect start image 9A indicating the start of the specific effect, such as "final judgment start". At the same time, display of a determination effect moving image (not shown), which is a moving image such as a predetermined movie image, is started. Judgment effect animation is, for example, a series of story-like movie animations such as a battle production in which an ally (player's ally) character fights against an enemy character. displayed continuously over time. The specific effect start effect is executed over a first predetermined period so that the player can easily recognize that the specific effect will be executed.

The left, middle and right performance patterns 91, 92 and 93 are variably displayed in a variably displayed small pattern variably displayed in a scaled down manner at the upper right corner of the screen. A downward arrow in the drawing indicates that the variable display is in progress.

When the judgment start effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29B, the effect display device 9 displays a winning promotion for promoting the winning of the game balls to the variable winning ball device 15, such as "Save the hold!" A prize-winning effect for displaying the image 9B is executed. The prize-winning effect is also the effect of promoting the winning of game balls to the variable winning ball device 15, and the effect of promoting the accumulation of the second reserved storage information. In this embodiment, the prize promotion image "Save the reserve!" is displayed in order to promote the accumulation of the second reserve storage information, and the prize winning of the game ball to the variable prize ball device 15 is promoted. In this sense, a prize promotion effect may be executed in which a prize promotion image specifying a specific prize portion is displayed, such as "Let the electric chew win the prize!"

For the prize-winning effect, the maximum period is set to a second predetermined period required for the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information to reach the maximum of "4" from "0", for example. Even during the second predetermined period, when the number of the second reserved storage information reaches the maximum "4", the operation is terminated at that point in order to suppress the subsequent useless shooting of game balls.

After the execution of the prize-winning promotion effect is started, it is possible to execute a change effect for changing the effect mode of the specific effect according to the number of the second reserved storage information. Specifically, when the second reserved memory information is "0", as shown in FIG. As the image of , an image of a performance pattern (hereinafter referred to as a ready-to-win pattern) in which a ready-to-win mode (7↓7) is formed with a pattern of "7" is displayed in the center of the screen. As shown in FIGS. 29(C) to (G), the winning promotion image 9B continues to be displayed in a reduced form in the upper left corner of the screen until the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces). be. The prize-winning promotion image 9B is erased immediately after the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces) as shown in FIG. 29(G).

When the first second pending memory information is generated in the state where the second pending memory information is "0", as shown in FIG. be. In the reserved first piece change performance, one ready-to-win pattern is added corresponding to the increase in the number of second reserved memories, and two ready-to-win patterns are displayed in a reduced form from the upper part of the center of the screen to the lower part of the screen. The effect image is changed in the effect. In FIG. 29(D), the top ready-to-win pattern shows the currently fluctuating effect patterns 91, 92, 93, and the second ready-to-win pattern shows the look-ahead effect pattern 94 corresponding to the first reserved one. . An image of the production pattern in which the ready-to-win pattern is formed is called a ready-to-win line. In this way, when the first second reserved storage information is generated, as shown in FIG. 29(D), effect control is executed to set the number of reach lines to two (2 lines). The effect of increasing and displaying the look-ahead effect pattern 94 consisting of such a reach pattern is called a reach line increase effect.

As shown in FIG. 29(E), when the second second hold memory information is generated and the second hold memory information is increased, the look-ahead effect pattern 94 consisting of the corresponding reach pattern of "7" Second reserved change performance for changing the performance mode is executed by additionally displaying under the look-ahead performance pattern 94 displayed in 1 and increasing the number of reach lines (three lines in total). As shown in FIG. 29(F), when the third second hold memory information is generated and the second hold memory information is increased, the look-ahead effect pattern 94 consisting of the corresponding reach pattern of "7" 3 is additionally displayed under the look-ahead performance pattern 94 displayed in , and the number of reach lines is increased (four lines in total) to change the performance mode. As shown in FIG. 29(G), when the fourth second reserved memory information is generated and the second reserved memory information is increased, the look-ahead effect pattern 94 consisting of the corresponding reach pattern of "7" 4 is additionally displayed under the look-ahead performance pattern 94 displayed in , and the number of reach lines is increased (five lines in total) to change the performance mode.

In this way, in the specific effect, there is a change effect that changes the effect mode to increase the number of reach lines by increasing the number of read-ahead effect symbols 94 made up of reach symbols in response to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information. done. As for the image displayed corresponding to the increase in the number of the second reserved memory information in the specific effect, the increase in the number of reach lines of the read-ahead effect pattern 94 consisting of the reach pattern of "7" is displayed as follows. There is

First, in the variable display other than the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, the ready-to-win pattern when the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the effect pattern to the ready-to-win display mode is, for example, "symbol of 7>symbol of 3>other numbers. In such a relationship as "symbol", selection is determined so that the degree of expectation for a big hit is different. Therefore, the player's expectation for a big win is highest when the ready-to-win symbol "7" is selected among the ready-to-win symbols selected from a plurality of types. Therefore, in the specific effect, each of the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 of the variable display and the look-ahead effect pattern 94 are selected from the viewpoint of the high degree of expectation for a big hit depending on the type of reach pattern. is displayed by As a result, in the specific effect, by displaying the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 of the variable display and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 with the ready-to-reach symbols of "7" which the player feels advantageous, the player is encouraged to hit the jackpot. You can raise your expectations. Furthermore, in the specific effect, the effect of increasing the number of reach lines by the reach symbol of "7" can further increase the player's expectation for a big win.

As the ready-to-win symbol used for the ready-to-reach line number increase effect in the specific effect, any symbol other than "7" may be used. For example, a pattern showing the character "RUSH" (a character that suggests an advantageous state for the player, such as a big hit rush, a small hit rush, a time saving state (electrical sapo state) rush) (in normal fluctuation display Designs dedicated to specific effects that are not used) may be used.

Moreover, you may use the reach symbol of "3". The reason is as follows. In pachinko gaming machines, generally, the ready-to-win pattern of "7" has a high degree of expectation for a big hit, a high degree of expectation for the maximum number of rounds at the time of occurrence of a big hit, and after the end of the big win game state It is used as a symbol that the player expects a high degree of expectation to be in an advantageous state for the player (time saving state, electric sapo state, probability variable state, etc. in a game machine that is a probability variable state). For example, the ready-to-win pattern when the ready-to-win display mode is used for the production pattern is, for example, a relationship such as "symbol of 7>symbol of 3>symbol of other numbers". are selected differently. As a result, when the ready-to-win pattern of "7" is displayed, it is expected that general players will have expectations that the number of rounds at the time of occurrence of the big win will be the maximum round.

Depending on the distribution of the number of rounds at the time of a big hit, the distribution of the type of jackpot generated by the variable display of the first special symbol and the distribution of the type of jackpot generated by the variable display of the second special symbol may be the maximum number of rounds. In some cases, the selection rate of types is set to be less than the selection rate of jackpot types other than the maximum number of rounds. In such a case, when a big hit is achieved based on the "7" ready-to-win pattern, which also has the meaning of suggesting a big hit with the maximum number of rounds in a specific effect, a jackpot type with a number of rounds other than the maximum number of rounds is selected. There may be cases. When a jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds is selected in spite of the big win based on the ready-to-win pattern of '7', the player feels that the big win based on the ready-to-win pattern of '7' is the maximum number of rounds. , the player's sense may not be consistent with the performance of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加In order to prevent such an inconsistency in feeling, the symbol "3", which has a lower expectation than "7" for the maximum number of rounds described above and a higher expectation for a big hit than other number symbols, is designated as a special effect. You may use it as a reach pattern which forms a reach line in.

In addition, as the reach line increase effect by the reach pattern in the specific effect, the reach is selected at a predetermined ratio according to the degree of expectation for a big hit from among the "7" pattern, the "3" pattern, and other patterns. You may form a reach line by a pattern. In that case, the degree of expectation for the big win and the degree of expectation for the maximum number of rounds of the big win as described above may be made different according to the type of the ready-to-win pattern displayed as the ready-to-win line. By doing so, the variation of the reach pattern of the reach line is enriched, and the player can recognize the degree of expectation that each of the second reserved memory information and the like will be a big hit, so that the entertainment of the performance is improved.

In addition, such a specific effect is the first special as the first variation display after the symbol 4R short-time jackpot game state ends, other than the first variation display of the second special symbol after the symbol 4R short-time jackpot game state ends. It may be executed when the variable display of the pattern is executed. Further, such a specific effect may be executed in a variable display at a predetermined timing after the end of the jackpot game state for a jackpot other than the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot.

When the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit value, or when the second predetermined period elapses after the start of the prize winning promotion effect, the prize winning promotion effect ends and is shown in FIGS. Suggestion performance suggesting whether it will be a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R short time big hit) is executed. If the number of second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit before the second predetermined period elapses during the execution period of the winning promotion effect, the effect is not progressed until the timing of starting the execution of the suggestive effect. It becomes a waiting period waiting for the passage of Since the start timing of the suggestive effect is set to a fixed timing in advance, such a waiting period is provided for the prize-winning effect. The standby period is not a period for executing a special effect, but a period for waiting for the progress of the effect (Note that during the standby period, a predetermined effect such as an effect indicating that the second reservation storage information is full may be displayed). In the suggestive effect, as shown in FIGS. 29(H) to (J), the display results are derived and displayed in order from the top on the reach lines arranged in the vertical direction corresponding to the variable display and the second reserved storage information. To go. Specifically, this change (referred to as the change) → 1st hold storage information → 2nd hold storage information → 3rd hold storage information → 4th hold storage information. A combination of stop symbols is shown for each line. Such a combination of stop symbols is also called a suggestive effect symbol.

29 (H) and (I) when the variation display and the stored second reserved memory information do not result in a small hit (big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time-saving big hit). 2, the corresponding ready-to-win symbols are displayed as suggestive performance symbols that are stopped in a combination of lost symbols (combination in which "7" symbols are not aligned). FIG. 29(J) shows a display example when the second piece of second reserved storage information is a small win (big win via a small win) or a big win (symbol 15R time-saving big win).

For each of the variation display and the stored second holding memory information, when a small win (big win via a small win) or a big win (symbol 15R short time big win) is made, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (J) , the corresponding ready-to-win symbols stop at a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of "7" symbols) and are enlarged and emphasized. A combination of three symbols is associated with an advantageous situation (such as a big win) for the player. As a result, during the variable display, the variable display and the stored second holding memory information become a small win (a big win via a small win) or a big win (a pattern 15R short-time big win) advantageous to the player, respectively. is suggested.

In this way, in the suggestive effect, by displaying a symbol combination image suggestive of an advantageous state for the player before a realistic big win, the player's expectation for the big win can be heightened. A symbol combination image suggesting a big win is displayed from the timing before the variation display result of the variation display is derived and displayed, thereby making the player feel at ease at an early timing and raising the interest of the player from an early timing. be able to. The suggestive effect period for performing such a suggestive effect is set so as to be executed in a common fixed effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

In the suggestive effect, if there are a plurality of small wins (big wins via small wins) or big wins (symbol 15R short-time big wins) among the variable display and the stored second reserved memory information, corresponding Each of a plurality of ready-to-win symbols is stopped at a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of "7" symbols), enlarged and highlighted.

In addition, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (symbol 15R time-saving big hits) among the variation display and the stored second pending memory information, a small hit (small hit via jackpot) or jackpot (symbol 15R time-saving jackpot), whichever is earlier (for example, the second second hold memory information and the third second hold memory information are information that will be a small hit or a big hit) When there is, only those corresponding to the second second reserved memory information) are targeted, and the corresponding reach symbols are stopped at the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of "7" symbols) and expanded. You may make it emphasize.

As shown in FIG. 29(J), symbols stopped and displayed in a combination of big-hit symbols having "7" symbols are a big-hit via a small-hit or a big-hit (symbol until the corresponding variable display (the variable display or the variable display based on the retained storage information) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is continuously displayed as an image that suggests (informs) that the player will be in an advantageous state.

After the suggestive effect is executed, the following display is performed at the end of the variable display. In the suggestive effect, the change display does not become a big hit or big win (symbol 15R short time big hit) via a small win, and the second reserved memory information has a big hit or big win (symbol 15R short time big win) via a small win. When it is included, as shown in FIG. 29(K), a look-ahead effect pattern 94 corresponding to the second reserved memory information stopped by the combination of the jackpot patterns is displayed at the center of the screen as a suggestive effect pattern, and the variable display. The variable display results of the performance patterns 91, 92, 93 corresponding to are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

In addition, in the suggestive effect, the change display becomes a big hit or a big win (symbol 15R short-time big win) via a small win, and the second holding storage information holds that the variable display is a big win or big win (symbol 15R short-time big win) via a small win. When the stored information is not included, the variable display result of the performance symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variable display stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols is displayed in the central part of the screen.

In addition, in the suggestive effect, the change display becomes a big hit or a big win (symbol 15R short time big hit) via a small win, and the second pending memory information is a big hit or big win (symbol 15R short time big win) via a small win. When included, the results of the variable display of the performance symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variable display stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols and the look-ahead performance symbols corresponding to the second reserved memory information stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols. 94 variable display results are displayed in the center of the screen.

In the variable display based on the second reserved memory information after the suggestive effect is completed, the effect of displaying (notifying) that the main symbol will be a big hit and that the small symbol will be lost is displayed (notified). may be

In the suggestive effect, the change display does not become a big hit or big win (symbol 15R short time big hit) via a small win, and the second reserved memory information has a big hit or big win (symbol 15R short time big win) via a small win. When it is not included, at the end of a series of suggestive effects, the combination of the winning symbols of the reach line, which is the combination of the winning symbols and the winning symbols, is displayed in the central part of the screen.

When there are a plurality of suggestive performance patterns 94 stopped in the combination of the jackpot patterns in the suggestive performance, a plurality of look-ahead performance patterns 94 are displayed in the combination of the jackpot patterns at the end of the variable display. When there are a plurality of look-ahead performance symbols 94 that are stopped in the combination of the jackpot symbols in the suggestive performance, one look-ahead performance pattern 94 may be displayed as a representative image in the combination of the jackpot symbols at the end of the variable display. .

After the variable display results in a false display, as shown in FIGS. 29(L) to 29(O), the variable display is sequentially executed for the second reserved storage information targeted for the specific effect. FIG. 29 is an example in which it is suggested that the second piece of second pending storage information in the suggestive effect will be a small hit (jackpot via a small win) or a big hit (symbol 15R time-saving jackpot). The state in which the look-ahead effect pattern 94 corresponding to the second reserved memory information stopped by the combination of the big hit patterns shown in 29(K) is displayed in the central portion of the screen continues, as shown in FIGS. 29(L) to (O). , The variable display of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to each reserved storage information itself is executed in a reduced form (small pattern form) at the lower right corner of the screen.

In the specific effect, when the second reserved memory information (in this example, the second reserved memory information) for which the look-ahead effect symbol 94 is the target of the combination of the big hit symbols is executed, the variable display of FIG. 29 (O) Thus, the display result of the production patterns 91, 92, 93 variably displayed at the lower right corner of the screen becomes the big hit display result, and the look-ahead production pattern 94 continuously displayed at the center of the screen is enlarged and emphasized. . As a result, in the specific performance, a performance is performed to notify that a small win (big win via a small win) or a big win (symbol 15R short-time big win) suggested by the suggestive performance is achieved. The determination effect moving image continuously displayed as a series of movie images from the start of the specific effect is terminated when the big win display is executed and the specific effect ends, as shown in FIG. be.

By executing such a specific effect, as shown in FIG. By changing the performance mode, the interest in the game can be improved by the fun of the performance.

As shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), by executing a change effect in relation to an increase in the number of pending storage information due to a winning promotion effect, a change effect and a hold in a specific effect It is possible to make it possible for the player to clearly recognize the relationship with the number of stored information. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the end of the performance without executing the change performance in the specific performance.

As shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, a reach line increase effect for increasing the number of reach lines in accordance with an increase in the number of second reserved storage information is executed. It is possible to visually understand the relationship between the effect and the number of second reserved storage information.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, by increasing the number of reach lines of the same "7" pattern according to the increase in the number of reserved storage information, The development and design of the performance control can be facilitated, for example, it is not necessary to consider the performance pattern related to the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player, such as changing the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player accordingly. In addition, due to the increase in the number of ready-to-win symbols, the player will pay attention to the specific performance with a certain sense of anticipation.

As shown in FIG. 30, the suggestive effect period is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of reach lines, thereby facilitating the development and design of the effect control.

As shown in FIGS. 29(G) and (H), the winning promotion effect is terminated when the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), thereby suppressing the promotion effect more than necessary. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the presentation.

As shown in FIGS. 29(A) to (O), a specific effect is executed in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pending storage information by means of an effect using a series of images such as a determination effect animation, so that the game is played by the effect. can improve the interest of

In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the effect of stopping the ready-to-win effect patterns 91, 92, 93 and the suggestive effect pattern 94 in the suggestive effect is not to stop in a predetermined order, You may perform the production|presentation which stops simultaneously by 1 time.

In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when stopping the ready-to-win effects patterns 91, 92, 93 and the suggestive effects pattern 94 in the suggestive effect, the operation means image such as the button image is displayed. display, display an operation prompting image such as a "push" image, and the suggestive effect pattern 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the action of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.), or in one time. You may perform the production|presentation which stops at the same time.

In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when stopping the ready-to-win effects patterns 91, 92, 93 and the suggestive effects pattern 94 in the suggestive effect, the operation means image such as the button image is displayed. There are times when it is displayed and times when it is not displayed, and it is a ratio set so that the degree of expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state (for example, a small win or a big win) is higher when it is displayed than when it is not displayed. , after displaying an operation means image and displaying an operation prompt such as a "press" image, the suggestive effect pattern 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the player's action (operation of the push button 120, etc.), Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the characters are stopped at once.

In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, after starting the prize-winning effect shown in FIG. The reach corresponding to the second reserved memory information during the period when the number of the second reserved memory information reaches the maximum "4" without executing the changed effect, or when the second predetermined period elapses. An effect may be executed in which the reach lines by the pattern are collectively formed at one time (the number of reach lines is increased at one time).

Further, in the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second pending storage information is provided for the effect suggesting that the suggestive effect will be a small hit (a big hit via a small win) or a big win (symbol 15R short-time big hit). The suggested examples are given in an order that corresponds to the order in which they occurred. However, not limited to this, the order of executing the production that suggests a small hit (big hit via a small win) or a big hit (symbol 15R short time big hit) is the second pending storage information generated at the start of the suggested production. The selection may be determined at random regardless of the order in which the selection is made.

In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a small win (a big win via a small win) or a big win (a pattern 15R time-saving big hit), but not only such a variable display result, for example, a predetermined production such as a battle production (a production in which an ally character and an enemy character fight) and a reach line display result. It may be executed in combination with a derivation effect. For example, before deriving and displaying the display result of each reach line, an image of a battle effect is displayed so that when the ally character wins, a combination of jackpot patterns is obtained, and when the ally character is defeated, a winning pattern combination is displayed. A combination of renditions may be used. Such a combination of effects may be executed at each turning point. For example, the combination of effects may be executed twice on the first reach line and the last reach line, and the effect may be executed only on the last reach line. A combination of Also, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be selected at random. In addition, the timing of executing the combination of performances may be different between when the expectation of a small win (big win via a small win) or big win (symbol 15R short-time big win) is high and when the expectation is low. There are times when such a combination of effects is not executed and times when it is executed, and when it becomes a small win (big hit via a small win) or a big win (symbol 15R short time big hit), even if it is executed with a probability of 100% It may well be such that it is not executed when there is no small win or big win. In addition, it may be executed so that the degree of expectation for a small win or a big win increases as the timing at which the performance by such a combination is executed approaches the last reach line. If it is possible to execute effects based on such various combinations, the variations of effects can be enriched, and the interest in the game can be improved by the fun of the effects.

In addition, in suggestive effects such as those shown in FIGS. 29(H) to (J), when the ready-to-win symbols are a combination of missing symbols, the combination of symbols may be deleted from the screen thereafter.

Next, the specific effect 1st process which executes the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 in the process during effect symbol fluctuation (S802) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a specific effect first process. The specific effect first process of FIG. 31 is configured and executed as part of the effect symbol change process (S802).

In the specific effect first process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the variable display executed this time is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot is completed ( S881).

In the game control microcomputer 560, as a variation pattern to be selected at the time of variation display, there is a special performance pattern as a performance pattern that is always selected at the time of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R short time jackpot. is provided. In the game control microcomputer 560, in the variation pattern setting process (S301) of FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not it is time for the first variation display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R short-time jackpot. a processing step, and when it is determined by the processing step that it is the time of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R short-time jackpot, the variation pattern of the variation display of that time is the above-mentioned A processing step of selecting a special variation pattern and a processing step of transmitting a variation pattern command designating the selected special variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 are included.

In S881, whether or not the special variation pattern as described above has been received is confirmed based on the data in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103, so that the variation display result of the variation display to be executed this time is confirmed. It is determined whether or not it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot.

In S881, when it is determined that it is the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot, if it is determined that it is not, the process is terminated, and it is determined that it is. Time determines whether or not the current timing is the start of the variable display (S882). When it is determined in S882 that it is time to start the variable display, as shown in FIG. 29A, the display of the determination start effect and the display of the determination effect moving image are started (S883), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S882 that it is not the start time of the variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the determination start effect by confirming the elapsed time from the start time of the determination start effect (S884). .

When it is determined in S884 that it is time to end the determination start effect, the display of the determination start effect is ended (S885). Then, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29B, a series of effects for displaying the reach line with the "7" symbol as shown in FIG. finish. In addition, when the number of second pending storage information is not "0" at the start of the specific effect, if there are several, when displaying the first reach line, the initial value of the second pending storage information Show number reach lines.

When it is determined in S884 that it is not the end of the determination start effect, it is determined at the time of start winning to the second start winning opening 14 based on whether or not it is time to receive the second start winning designation command. It is determined whether there is (S887). When it is determined in S887 that it is the start winning time, the starting winning number counter as a counting means for counting the starting winning number to the second starting winning opening 14 during the specific performance is updated by +1 (S888). The starting winning prize number counter is a counting means for counting the number of starting winning balls entering the second starting prize winning port 14 when executing a specific effect. The starting prize winning number counter counts the number of starting winning balls into the second starting winning hole 14 with the number of second reserved storage information (for example, "0" etc.) at the start of the specific effect as an initial value. Next, according to the number of starting winning prizes counted by the starting winning prize number counter updated in S888, change effects as shown in FIGS.

When it is determined in S887 that it is the start winning time, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the winning promotion notification effect (S890). At S890, the value of the starting prize number counter has reached the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information, or the predetermined execution period of the promotion notification effect (the above-mentioned second predetermined period) has ended. When at least one of the above is established, it is determined that it is time to end the winning promotion notification effect. When it is determined in S890 that it is time to end the winning promotion notification effect, the winning promotion notification effect is terminated (S891) as shown in FIG. Acquire the current second pending memory information (holding memory information based on the second start winning to the second start winning opening 14) (S892). Then, based on the acquired second reserved storage information, the process of starting the suggestive effects as shown in FIGS.

Specifically, in S893, for the currently varying production patterns 91, 92, and 93, the pattern big hit (symbol 15R short-time big hit) or small hit (16 (15) R via small hit) is determined based on the received display result command. Time-saving jackpot, small-hit via 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot, small-hit via 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot) is determined, and the prefetching performance pattern 94 corresponding to the second reservation storage information is acquired. Based on the second holding storage information, each holding storage information is a pattern big hit (symbol 15R short time big hit) or a small hit (via small hit 16 (15) R short time big hit, small hit 9 (8) R short time big hit, small It is determined whether or not it will be a hit via 5 (4) R time-saving big hit). Then, in S893, among the ready-to-win symbols displayed on the effect display device 9, those corresponding to the second reserved storage information that become a symbol big hit or a small hit are selected as big hit symbols. The combination (777) is displayed, and for those corresponding to the second reserved storage information that are lost, the effect of displaying the combination of the lost symbols (combination other than 777) is executed in order for each displayed ready-to-win symbol. A performance pattern that continues is determined, and the determined performance is started.

In addition, in the suggestive effect, a different effect from the derivation effect of the display result on the reach line such as a specific chance-up notice may be executed together. When executing such another effect, in S893, The performance pattern is selected and determined, and execution is started. For example, when executing a chance-up notice that changes the background image color to blue, green, red, gold, etc. according to the degree of expectation of a small hit or a big hit (the degree of expectation of a big hit is blue < green < red < gold) , to confirm the contents of the second reserved storage information, and a predetermined chance-up notice data table (a data table in which the selection ratio of the background image is changed depending on whether or not there is the second reserved storage information for small wins or big wins, etc.) ) to select and determine the background image color.

When it is determined in S890 that it is not the end time of the winning promotion notification effect, it is determined whether it is the end time of the suggestion effect by confirming whether it is the end time of the variable display currently being executed. (S894). If it is determined in S894 that the suggestive effect is not finished, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S894 that it is time to end the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is ended (S895), the specific effect execution flag is set (S896), and the process ends.

The specific effect execution flag set in S896 is a flag indicating whether or not the specific effect is being executed, and is provided for the following purposes. First, as shown in FIG. 29(K), when displaying the display result of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R short-time jackpot is completed during execution of the specific performance, It is checked in S803 of FIG. 19 whether or not the specific effect execution flag is set, and if it is set, the variable display result at the end of the variable display in the effect mode of the specific effect as shown in FIG. 29(K). is displayed. Second, during the production period of the specific production shown in FIG. O) is used to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect second process shown in FIG.

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the specific effect second process. The specific effect second process of FIG. 32 is configured and executed as part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

In the specific effect second process, first, in order to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the specific effect executing flag is set (S901). When the specific effect execution flag is not set in S901, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the fixed effect execution flag is set in S901, the effect data necessary for executing the variable display in the variable mode at the time of the specific effect such as those shown in FIGS. Set (S902). Then, "-1" is subtracted from the starting prize number counter (S903). By subtracting the start prize number counter in S903, whether or not the second reserved memory information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game state of the symbol 4R time-short jackpot has been digested by the variation display. It is possible to check whether

Next, it is checked whether or not the starting winning number counter has reached "0" (S904). The fact that the starting winning prize number counter has become "0" means that all the reserved memory information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special pattern after the end of the jackpot game state of the pattern 4R time-saving jackpot has been digested. showing. If the start winning number counter is not "0" in S904, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the start prize number counter is "0" in S904, the specific effect in-execution flag is reset (S905), the display of the determination effect moving image is terminated (S905), and the process is terminated. As a result, when all the reserved memory information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special pattern after the end of the jackpot game state of the pattern 4R short-time jackpot is completed, the specific performance is finished.

[Description of Characteristic Portions 244F and 245F]
Characteristic portions 244F and 245F of the present embodiment will now be described. Regarding the characteristic parts 244F and 245F, the effect control microcomputer 100 is the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state of various jackpots as shown in FIG. Execution of display control to display the remaining number of variable display that can be executed (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining number of time reduction) Then, various characteristic display control techniques for the display control will be described.

Regarding the characteristic part 244F, the remaining number of time-savings for the second variable display (hereinafter also referred to as the second variable display or the second special symbol variation) executed based on the second reserved memory during the time-saving state is displayed. 1st display control as the display control executed when the first variable display (hereinafter also referred to as the first variable display or the first special symbol variation) executed based on the first reserved storage is executed when the An example and a second display control example will be described.

As a first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of time saving is displayed for the second variable display in the time saving state, the remaining number of times of saving time is not displayed. Display control to make it so will be explained.

As a second display control example, in the time saving state, when the first variable display is performed while the remaining number of time saving for the second variable display is being displayed, and when the first variable display is performed Next, display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of times of time saving will be described.

For various jackpots as shown in FIG. 2, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display during the time saving state after the jackpot game state is finished is the first number (for example, 11 times, etc.), and the second time when the number of times of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) during the time saving state is less than the first time (for example, 7 times, etc.) The control for terminating the time saving state is executed based on the fact that either one of the conditions is satisfied.

Regarding the characteristic portion 245F, regarding the display of the remaining number of variable displays during the time saving state, at least the remaining number of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second variable display. When the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the condition is satisfied is exceeded, the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of times of the variable display during the time saving state, and at least until the first condition is satisfied. is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times is the remaining number of times of the total number of times. Display control to be displayed will be explained.

The production control microcomputer 100 displays the remaining number of times of variable display of special symbols executable during the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state (time saving remaining number of times) on the production display device 9, and according to the game situation. , to control the display of the remaining number of times.

[Example of first display control]
FIG. 33-1 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a first display control example of the remaining number of time saving. In FIG. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of an effect mode in the time saving state after the jackpot game state of the symbol 15R time saving jackpot (see FIG. 2). In FIG. 33-1, during the time saving state, after the variable display of the production pattern is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H), the big hit display result is derived and displayed as shown in (I). A control example is shown.

As an example, the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit is the first condition that the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state is 11 times, and the time saving The number of times of the second special symbol variation in the state is ended based on the fact that either one of the second condition is satisfied. Hereinafter, in the time saving state, the remaining number of the total number of times of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation which is the first condition of the time saving end condition is called "total remaining number", and in the second condition of the time saving end condition The remaining number of times only for a certain second special symbol variation is called "second special symbol remaining number".

As shown in FIG. 33-1(A), when the jackpot game state ends, a time-saving start display image 98 showing the characters "chance time entering" is displayed to notify that the time-saving state is started. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (A) to (H), during the time saving state, a right hitting image 97 instructing (promoting) to hit to the right (aiming for winning the second start prize opening 14) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), at the start of the time saving state (total remaining number of times 11 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7 times), as an image showing the remaining number of times of the time saving state, "remaining 7 times" is displayed. A time saving remaining number image 96 displaying "remaining 7 times" indicates the remaining number of times of only the second special symbol variation which is the second condition of the time saving end condition.

In the time saving state, at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is met, the second special figure remaining as the number of time saving remaining Display the number of times. Then, during the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times. do. Also, in the time saving state, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied are the same, the second special figure remaining as the number of time saving remaining Display the number of times.

When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied are the same, the total remaining number of times may be displayed as the time reduction remaining number of times.

In this example, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number of times is displayed as the number of time saving remaining times, When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the number of time reduction remaining times.

As a specific example, the following display of the remaining number of times of shortening is performed. For example, "Total remaining number of times 11 times, 2nd special figure remaining number of times 7" in Figure 33-1 (B), "Total remaining number of times 10 times, 2nd special figure remaining number of times 7 times" in Figure 33-1 (E) ", Fig. 33-1 (F), (G) "total remaining number of times 9 times, second special figure remaining number of times 6 times", when the total remaining number exceeds the second special figure remaining number, As the remaining number of time reduction, Figure 33-1 (B), (E) "remaining 7 times", Figure 33-1 (F), the second special figure remaining number such as (G) "remaining 6 times" It is displayed by the time saving remaining number image 96. On the other hand, when the total remaining number is less than the second special figure remaining number, such as "total remaining number 4 times, second special figure remaining number 5 times" in FIG. The total remaining number of times such as “remaining 4 times” in FIG.

At the start of the production of the time-saving state, the combination of the jackpot patterns ("333" in this example) that triggered the start of the time-saving state is stopped and displayed with the production patterns 91, 92, 93 and the constantly fluctuating small pattern 90. It is displayed as an initial display image, and thereafter, variable display of the time saving state according to the start winning is executed. In the first variable display (first special pattern variation) in the time saving state, the pattern of the previous variable display result of the production patterns 91, 92, 93 as shown in FIG. 33-1 (B) is displayed for 2 to 3 seconds. As shown in FIG. 33-1(C), the player makes a swinging motion on the spot, and immediately, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state is, as shown in FIGS. The display (display of the downward arrow in the figure) is performed in a variable operation for 4 to 5 seconds, and the result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

The average variation time of the first variable display in the time saving state and the average variation time of the second variable display in the time saving state are different times (first variable display > second variable display, or first Variable display<second variable display), or similar time (same time). In addition, the first variable display in the time saving state may be a scroll display of a time saving pattern like the second variable display.

In the production display device 9, the production patterns 91, 92, 93 are variably displayed (any variable display mode such as scroll display of patterns, switching display of patterns, etc.), and the production patterns 91, 92 are displayed. , 93 are displayed. The constantly fluctuating small pattern 90 is variably displayed in such a manner that the pattern always fluctuates during the fluctuation period of the special pattern, regardless of the display mode in which the performance pattern is displayed. By displaying such a constantly fluctuating small pattern 90, for example, as shown in FIG. , the display state of the always-variable small pattern 90 clearly indicates that the variable display is in progress, and also clearly indicates the result of the variable display. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (I), when the variable display result of the production patterns 91, 92, and 93 is the big hit display result, the display result of the constant variable small pattern 90 is also the big hit display result, and "big hit!" Such a big hit notification image 99 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), in the time saving state, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed Sometimes, as shown in FIGS. 33-1(C) and 33-1(D), the time saving remaining number image 96 is temporarily erased during the variable display period (fluctuation time) of the first variable display (the part indicated by the dashed line in the figure ), as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E), the remaining time saving number image 96 is redisplayed without updating the display of the remaining time saving number at the start of execution of the next second variable display (second special symbol variation). By doing so, display control is executed that does not update the display of the remaining number of times of saving time.

As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, if the first variable display is executed, the remaining Since it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of times of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to (E), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed, By erasing the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the erased remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to control the display so that the remaining number of times is not displayed. Since the display of the remaining number of times is erased and re-displayed to suggest that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated, the remaining number of times of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further felt by the player. can be displayed without giving

Also, as described above, in the time saving state, at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining number of times As the second special figure remaining number is displayed. Then, in the time saving state, at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

FIG. 33-2 is a flow chart showing the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 for executing the effect display of the remaining number of times of time saving shown in FIG. 33-1. FIG. 33-2 (A) shows a process (remaining time saving number display processing A) for controlling the display of the remaining number of time saving at the time of fluctuation start, and FIG. 33-2 (B) shows the remaining number of time saving at the time of stop Processing for controlling display (effect symbol variation stop processing) is shown.

The time saving remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2(A) is a process performed as a part of the process in the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in FIG.

First, at the time of this variable display, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable display (first variable display) of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state ( S911). In S911, by checking whether or not the second special figure remaining number display flag set by S928 described later is set, it is determined whether or not the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state . Then, in S911, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol based on whether or not the first special symbol variation designation command of FIG. 7 is received.

In S911, when it is not the time to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the process is terminated. On the other hand, in S911, when it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed during this variable display. , As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D), it is a time saving setting for executing an effect that is temporarily erased (the part indicated by the dashed line in the figure) during the variable display period of the first variable display. The remaining number of times display is set to be erased (S912), and the remaining number of times of shortening is not displayed again until the execution of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) is started next after finishing the processing. It should be noted that the time saving remaining number display deletion setting in S912 is for the time saving remaining number image 96, in addition to the effect of once erasing the time saving remaining number image 96, as shown in FIG. It may be a setting for executing an effect to be displayed.

In this way, when the time saving remaining number display deletion setting is performed, the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the production design fluctuation processing (S802) and the production design fluctuation stopping process (S803) of FIG. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed while being displayed, there is an effect of erasing the time saving remaining number image 96 as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D). executed. On the other hand, in S911, when it is determined that it is not the time to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, S912 is not executed, so in the time saving state 2 When the second special symbol is displayed while the remaining number of special symbols is displayed, and when the first different symbol is displayed while the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state or When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 33-1(E) to (H).

33-2 (B) production symbol fluctuation stop processing is a processing configured to be able to execute the display control of the remaining number of time reduction shown in FIG. 33-1 in the production design fluctuation stop processing of S803 of FIG. be.

In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, it is checked whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (S921). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the stop design display flag is not set, the predetermined stop design (lost design, big hit design, or small hit design) for the production designs 91, 92, 93 and the constantly fluctuating small design 90. is stopped and displayed (S922).

Next, it is checked whether or not the stopped symbol is a symbol that will result in a big win (that is, whether or not the big win display result has been displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a big hit, a stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the symbol is not a big hit, it is confirmed whether or not the symbol is a small win (that is, whether or not the small win display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a small hit, a stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when it is not a pattern that becomes a small hit, that is, when it is a lost pattern, the remaining number of times of the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation which is the first condition of the time saving end condition "Total remaining number of times ” (S925).

The "total remaining number of times" is a counting area for counting the total remaining number of times in the RAM 103, and in the counting area, when the big win game state is completed, a first special symbol that differs depending on the type of big win as shown in FIG. A first symbol variation specifying command transmitted when the total number of variations and the second special symbol variation is set as an initial value of the "total remaining number of times" and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed; When the performance control microcomputer 100 receives any of the second symbol variation designation command transmitted when the variation display of the special symbol is executed, a calculation of subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such calculation of the "total remaining number of times" is performed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, such as the command analysis process (S704) in FIG. 18, for example. In S925, the "total remaining number of times" is confirmed by confirming the "total remaining number of times" data thus calculated.

Next, the "second special symbol remaining number" which is the remaining number of times of only the second special symbol variation, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is confirmed (S926). The "second special figure remaining number" is provided in the RAM 103 with a counting area for counting the second special figure remaining number. When the maximum value of the number of times of only the second special symbol fluctuation, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition that differs depending on the time, is set as the initial value of the "second special symbol remaining number", and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed When the production control microcomputer 100 receives the second symbol variation designation command transmitted to the controller 100, an operation of subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such calculation of the "second special figure remaining number" is performed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, such as the command analysis process (S704) of FIG. 18, for example. In S926, the "second special figure remaining number" is confirmed by confirming the data of the "second special figure remaining number" thus calculated.

Next, it is checked whether or not the "total remaining number of times" confirmed in S925 is equal to or greater than the "second special figure remaining number of times" confirmed in S926 as the remaining number of times in the time saving state (S927). When the "total remaining number" is greater than or equal to the "second special figure remaining number" in S927, the second special figure remaining number confirmed in S926 is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 (S928), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 33-1(B) and (F), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed with the second special symbol remaining number which is the remaining number of the second special symbol variation. In addition, in S928, a second special figure remaining number display flag is set which indicates that the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state. On the other hand, when the "total remaining number" is less than the "second special figure remaining number" in S927, the total remaining number confirmed in S925 is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 (S929), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33-1(H), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as "total remaining number" which is the remaining number of the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. In addition, in S929, a total remaining number display flag is set to indicate that the total remaining number of times is being displayed in the time saving state. In S930, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S930), and the process ends.

Also, depending on whether it is determined at S921 that the stop symbol display flag is set, or whether it is determined to be a big hit at S923 or a small hit at S924, the stop symbol display flag is set at S931. In the case where the jackpot start designation command is received, whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (one of the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to the jackpot start 5 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command is received is set. Confirm (S932).

If it is determined in S932 that the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S934). Then, preparations are set for execution of a big win display, such as a fanfare effect for a big win (S934). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) (S935), and the process is terminated. Preparation settings for executing a big win display include, for example, selection of a process table for executing a big win display such as a fanfare effect corresponding to the big win type, start of a process timer, and effect display device 9 according to the content of process data. Execution start etc. of the control of the production device etc. are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S932 that the jackpot start designation command reception flag is not set, the small hit start designation command reception flag (first small hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit start designation command has been received ~ Any of the third small hit start designation command reception flag) is set (S936).

If it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit start designation command reception flag is set in S936, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S937). Then, a preparation setting is made for executing a small-hit display, such as a fanfare effect for a small-hit (S938). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (S808) (S939), and the process is terminated. Preparatory settings for executing a small win display include, for example, selection of a process table for executing a small win display such as a fanfare effect for a small win, start of a process timer, and an effect display device according to the contents of process data. 9 or the like is started to control the production device.

By executing processes such as S924 to S929 among such effect symbol variation stop processing, in the effect symbol variation stop processing, the display control of the remaining number of time reductions as shown in FIG. 33-1 is executed. can be done.

[Second display control example]
FIG. 33-3 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a second display control example of the remaining number of times of reducing time. In FIG. 33-3, as in FIG. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of the effect mode in the time saving state after the jackpot game state of the symbol 15R time saving jackpot (see FIG. 2). It is In FIG. 33-2, during the time saving state, after the variable display of the production pattern is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H), as in FIG. 33-1, as shown in (I) shows a control example in which a big hit display result is derived and displayed.

FIG. 33-3 differs from FIG. 33-1 in that the following display control is executed. As shown in FIG. 33-3(B), the remaining time saving image 96 is normally displayed in red (in the figure, the letters “(red)” represent the color of the remaining time saving image 96). Color (normal color). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), in the time saving state, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the color of the time saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the standard red color to the blue color throughout the variable display period of the first variable display, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). While changing to a special color, the microcomputer 100 for production|presentation control performs the display control which does not update the display of the remaining number of times of time saving displayed by the image 96 of the remaining number of times of working time.

As shown in FIGS. 33-3(C) and (D), the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours image 96 in the time saving state. In this case, it is possible to perform display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of times, so that the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed, By changing the color of the image 96 of the remaining number of times of working hours and displaying it, an effect is given to suggest that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated, so that the remaining number of times of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state can be further displayed by the player. can be displayed without giving a sense of incongruity.

Also, as described above, in the time saving state, at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining number of times As the second special figure remaining number is displayed. Then, in the time saving state, at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

FIG. 33-4 is a flow chart showing the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 for executing the effect display of the remaining number of times of time saving shown in FIG. 33-3. FIG. 33-4 (A) shows processing for controlling the time saving number display at the time of fluctuation start (time saving remaining number display process B), and FIG. 33-4 (B) shows time saving number display at the time of fluctuation stop Control processing (effect symbol variation stop processing) is shown.

The time saving remaining number display process B in FIG. 33-4 (A) is similar to the time saving remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2 (A). It is a process performed as a process.

The processing shown in FIG. 33-4 differs from the processing shown in FIG. 33-2 in FIG. 33-4 (A), and FIG. 33-4 (B) differs from FIG. It is a similar process. The time saving remaining number display process B in FIG. 33-4 (A) differs from the time saving remaining number display process A in FIG. 33-2 (A) in S911. When it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the Over the period, while changing the remaining number of working hours image 96 from the standard color of red to the special color of blue, it is a setting for executing an effect that does not update the display of the remaining number of working hours displayed in the remaining number of working hours image 96. A certain time-saving remaining number display update limit setting is performed (S912A), and the process is terminated.

In this way, when the time saving remaining number display update limit setting is performed, the second special figure remaining number as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the production design fluctuation process (S802) and the production design fluctuation stop process (S803) of FIG. is displayed, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, as shown in FIGS. An effect is executed in which the color is changed to a blue special color and the display of the remaining number of times of reduction in time displayed in the image 96 of remaining number of times of reduction in time is not updated.

In FIG. 33-4 (B), similarly to FIG. 33-2 (B), by executing the processes such as S924 to S929, in the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, time saving as shown in FIG. 33-3 Display control of the remaining number of times can be executed.

In addition, in the first display control example of FIG. 33-1 and the second display control example of FIG. 33-3, at the start of the production of the time saving state (at the time of entering the chance time), the big hit that triggered the start of the time saving state The combination of symbols ("333" in this example) is stopped and displayed with the production patterns 91, 92, 93 and the constantly fluctuating small pattern 90, and is displayed as an initial display image at the start of the production of the time saving state, After that, when the first variable display is executed, the pattern of the previous variable display result swings on the spot to derive and display the current display result. However, not limited to this, at the start of the production of the time saving state (at the time of entering the chance time), it is not a combination of the jackpot patterns that triggered the start of the time saving state, but always a missing pattern such as "123". After displaying a combination of (so-called loose eyes, etc.), variable display in the time saving state may be executed.

In general, when the performance symbols are swinging on the spot in the state of the combination of the jackpot symbols, the player misunderstands that the variable display result of this time is displayed as the combination of the jackpot symbols. Sometimes. Therefore, in order not to cause such a misunderstanding, at the start of the performance of the time saving state, the combination of winning symbols should be displayed and then the variable display in the time saving state should be executed. In this way, even if the first variable display is executed for the first time in the time saving state and the display result is a failure display result, an effect of changing from the failure display result to another failure display result is performed. Therefore, when the first variable display is executed as the first variable display at the start of the production of the time saving state, for example, from the combination of the jackpot symbols of "333", which is swinging on the spot, suddenly " It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity which is considered to be felt when changing to a combination of winning symbols of "334".

In addition, at the start of the production of the time saving state (at the time of entering the chance time), the combination of the jackpot patterns ("333" in this example) that triggered the start of the time saving state is the production patterns 91, 92, 93 and the constant fluctuation small. The state in which the pattern 90 is stopped and displayed is continued to be displayed as an initial display image at the time of starting the performance of the time saving state, and thereafter, the combination of the big hit patterns is shaken on the spot, resulting in a missing display result. Even when the variable display is executed, the combination of the jackpot symbols may be maintained and displayed as the variable display result of this time. In that case, since the production pattern is only a pattern for production, for example, other elements of the production display device 9 such as a fourth pattern etc. that can indicate whether or not the production pattern is being displayed in a variable display Depending on the specific symbols displayed in the area, in the execution of the first variable display, the performance symbols that are swinging are being variably displayed, and the performance symbols that are stopped are not displayed, and the result of the jackpot display. It is sufficient if it is possible to indicate whether it is

[Example of time saving remaining count update lock display control]
Next, as in the second display control example, in the time saving state, when the remaining number of times of the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed, when the first variable display is executed, the remaining time As an example in which a predetermined image indicating that the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving state is not updated is displayed superimposed on the remaining number of times of saving time image 96 when performing display control that does not update the display of the number of times, the remaining number of times of saving time update lock display control is performed. explain.

FIG. 33-5 is an enlarged view of the display area in the vicinity of the remaining number of working hours image 96 showing an example of lock display control for updating the remaining number of working hours. For example, in the second display control example as shown in FIG. 33-3, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D), when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 In addition, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the display of the remaining number of times of the time saving remaining number of times image 96 is not updated. As shown in FIG. 33-5, in the example of the lock display control for updating the remaining number of times of working hours, when the display of the remaining number of times of the remaining number of working hours image 96 is not updated, the display of the remaining number of times of the time saving state is not updated. As the suggested predetermined image, a lock image 96A having transparency and surrounding the remaining number of working hours image 96 and capable of indicating in a display mode that the remaining number of working hours image 96 is not updated is superimposed on the remaining number of working hours image 96. Display control to display is performed. A part of the lock image 96A includes character information such as "LOCK" indicating that the display of the remaining number of times will not be updated. Note that the lock image 96A does not have to include character information such as "LOCK" that suggests that the display of the remaining number of times will not be updated.

Such a superimposed display of the lock image 96A may be executed, for example, by setting display in the time saving remaining number update limit display setting in S912A of FIG. 33-4(A).

As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the time saving remaining number By performing display control to superimpose and display a predetermined image suggesting that the remaining number of times is not updated, such as the lock image 96A, on the image 96, the remaining number of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further increased. It is possible to display without giving a sense of incompatibility to the person.

The image to be displayed superimposed on the remaining number of time saving images 96 may be an image with high transparency or an image with low transparency. As long as it is possible. Further, as an image to be superimposed on the remaining number of times of working hours image 96, it is possible to visually recognize that the remaining number of working hours image 96 itself is displayed, but it may be an image in which the numerical value of the remaining number of times cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image superimposed on the remaining number of time saving images 96 may be either an image covering the remaining number of time saving images 96 or an image covering a part of the remaining number of time saving images 96 .

[First display control restriction example]
Next, the first display control described above, that is, during the time saving state, when the remaining number of times of the time saving state for the second variable display is displayed, when the first variable display is executed, the remaining time A first display control limitation example will be described as a control that imposes a limitation on the display control that does not display the number of times.

As described above, during the time saving state, when displaying the remaining number of variable displays in the time saving state, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is It has been explained that when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the total number of times is displayed instead of the remaining number of times of the second variable display as the remaining number of times.

Therefore, when the total remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the first variable It is considered that the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable even if the display is not controlled so as not to display the remaining number of times when the display is executed. Further, it is not considered necessary to prevent the display of the remaining number of times when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display is being displayed. be done. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100, during the time saving state, when displaying the remaining number of times of the time saving state of the variable display, at least the total of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied When the remaining number of times is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, even if the first variable display is executed, Control which restrict|limits 1st display control is performed by performing control which does not erase|eliminate the remaining number of times in the time saving remaining number of times image 96. FIG.

In such a first display control limitation example, the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the remaining number of times of the second number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When it is less than the first variable display, the display of the remaining number of times according to the game state is displayed by restricting the display control effect so as not to display the remaining number of times even when the first variable display is executed. Therefore, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Specific notification example]
Next, a specific notification example that can be executed in common for display control of the remaining number of times of variable display executed during the time saving state described above will be described. The specific notification is, as described above, the end condition of the time saving state by the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display, and the end condition of the time saving state by the number of times of the second variable display. is defined, the greater the number of times the first variable display is performed, the more disadvantageous the player will be, so in order to avoid such a situation as much as possible, the second This is a notification executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 to specially promote the execution of the second variable display based on the number of times of the first variable display being equal to or greater than a specific number.

FIG. 33-6 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an example of specific notification. In FIG. 33-6, in the time saving state, the specific number of times is set to, for example, 4 times, and when the first variable display that is less than the specific number of times, such as 3 times, is executed, FIG. 33-6 (A ), specific notification is not executed. On the other hand, when the first variable display is performed a specific number of times, such as four times, during the short state, a part of the right-handed image 97 is displayed rightward as shown in FIG. 33-6(B). A right-handed shot emphasized image 97A in which the arrow image is displayed much larger than the right-pointing arrow image of the right-handed shot image 97 in FIG. Furthermore, as the specific notification, a sound different from the sound output when the normal right-handed shot image 97 is displayed (for example, a loud sound, a warning sound, a disadvantageous to the player if he does not hit rightward) A special sound such as a sound indicating that the state of Furthermore, as the specific notification, the light emission mode of light emitters such as various lamps provided in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to a light emission mode different from the light emission mode of the normal right-handed image 97 (e.g., light emission with a large light volume). , emission with different emission colors, emission with different blinking cycles, and combinations thereof) are executed.

According to such a specific notification example, based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display during the time saving state is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, the specific notification is made, so that the first variable display and the second variable display In a game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times or the second variable display, the specific notification can prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

[Description of Characteristic Portions 068SH and 069SH]
Next, an embodiment related to the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH of this embodiment will be described. In the embodiments relating to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH, notification regarding the variable winning ball device 15 will be described. In the description of the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH, reserved memory information or reserved memory is also expressed as reserved information. The number of pending information is also expressed as the number of pending items. Also, similarly to the above-described embodiments, variable display is also expressed as variable display.

The characteristic part 068SH is when the number of pieces of pending information stored by the second pending storage buffer is a first number (0 to 3) and when it is a second number (4) greater than the first number. , are characterized by different notification modes. Further, when the number of pending information stored in the second pending storage buffer reaches the upper limit number (4) of pending information that can be stored in the second pending storage buffer in a predetermined period, the characteristic part 069SH It is characterized by executing arrival notification indicating that it has reached.

First, the technical background of the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH will be described. In recent years, the specifications and game methods of gaming machines have diversified, and even players who have been playing with the gaming machines for many years find it difficult to understand the specifications and game methods of the gaming machines they are playing. For example, it seems that something is happening in a game machine, but I don't know what is happening, and I don't know where to shoot the game ball, or is there any loss if I shoot the game ball? people may feel uneasy. In particular, such a tendency is conspicuous in a special model called a one- and two-kind mixer.

If the player does not understand the game method, etc., the player may be disadvantaged or miss an advantageous right. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period by the notification by the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH. In addition, the state in which the player feels uneasy not only hinders the enhancement of interest, but also makes it impossible to fully feel the original features of the gaming machine. According to the present embodiment, since such anxiety can be eliminated, the player's interest can be improved, and since the player can easily understand the features of the gaming machine, the player's excitement can be further enhanced. can be done. In the conventional game machine, there were times when a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit was reported, but this lacked specificity and could not prevent wasteful hitting of game balls. The characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH will be described in detail below.

FIG. 34-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 068SH100 used in describing the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH. The major difference between the pachinko machine 068SH100 and the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. is provided, and an LED for instructing right-handed or left-handed hitting is provided.

As shown in FIG. 34-1, the variable display device 68SH009 of the pachinko game machine 068SH100 has a plurality of reels (hereinafter also referred to as "reels") having a plurality of types of identification information (designs) attached to their surfaces. A plurality of display areas are formed in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotating a plurality of drums. Note that the symbols include blank symbols. In the variable display device, reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, and 68SH009R (hereinafter also referred to as "left reel," "middle reel," and "right reel") are horizontally arranged side by side. are arranged so that three consecutive regions can be seen through the see-through window. In this embodiment, effective lines 68SHL1 (upper), 68SHL2 (middle), 68SHL3 (lower), 68SHL4 (downward to the right), and 68SHL5 (upward to the right) indicated by dashed lines in FIG. If 7s are aligned, it becomes a big hit or a small hit.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 068SH100 is provided with a first reserved memory display 68SH001 and a second reserved memory display 68SH002, each of which is composed of four LEDs. Each LED lights up to indicate that a variable display that has not yet started is pending. In FIG. 34-1, white circles indicate non-reserved and black circles indicate reserved. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol is 0 and the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol is two.

The pachinko game machine 068SH100 is provided with batting instruction arrows LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R. The pachinko game machine 068SH100 lights up the hitting instruction arrow LED 68SH005L when instructing the player to hit left, and lights up the hitting instruction arrow LED 68SH005R when instructing the player to hit right. In FIG. 34-1, white arrows indicate that the hitting instruction arrow LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R are off, and black arrows indicate that they are on. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that a right-handed hit is instructed. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 068SH100 is provided with a board surface lamp 68SH015. The board surface lamp 68SH015 is provided on the back surface of the game board 6 and is a lamp that illuminates the game board 6 from the back side of the game board 6 , and the illuminated light passes through the game board 6 . The board surface lamp 68SH015 also illuminates the area around the variable winning ball device 15 . The pachinko game machine 068SH100 is provided with an electric tuning lamp 68SH016. The electric tuning lamp 68SH016 is a lamp provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and is a lamp for making the variable winning ball device 15 stand out.

The variable winning ball device 15 is a function as a variable winning ball device that changes between the open state and the closed state as described above. Specifically, in the pachinko game machine 068SH100 related to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH, the variable winning ball device 15 has a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize, and an open state in which a game ball is more likely to win a prize than in the closed state. can be changed to Also, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a mark "M" as a mark. The mark "M" is used to notify that the variable winning ball device 15 is open (audio notification: "Aim for M").

FIG. 34-2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The difference from the main board (game control board) 31 shown in FIG. A device 68SH001 and a second reserved storage indicator 68SH002 are included as new configurations.

The reel motor 68SH010 is controlled by a motor drive signal (stepping motor phase signal) output from the effect control board 80 . A reel motor 68SH010 is provided for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, so that each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel displays three continuous areas in the perspective window while continuously changing. By stopping the rotation of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, three continuous regions are derived and displayed on the transparent window 3 as a display result.

The reel sensor 68SH012 is provided inside the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and detects the reference position for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. The reel LED 68SH014 illuminates the left reel, middle reel, and right reel from behind. The reel LED 68SH014 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive areas of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and each area can be illuminated independently.

FIG. 34-3 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of reels. On the reels, red 7, blue 7, promotion notification symbols, and arrival notification symbols are drawn in a predetermined order as symbols (identification information) so as to be mutually identifiable. Of these, red 7 and blue 7 are of a size that can be accommodated within one area, but the promotion notification pattern and arrival notification pattern are of a size that spans three continuous areas.

FIG. 34-4(A) is a diagram showing a hit type table in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The main difference from the classification table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the pattern jackpot are provided without time reduction. In this embodiment, as the types of big hits, a big hit with 5R short working hours, a big hit without 5R short working hours, a big hit with 11 (10) R short working hours via a small hit, and a big hit with 6 (5) short working hours via a small hit are provided. there is The parenthesis of the big hit via the small hit shows the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. The big hit determination value described with reference to FIG. 5B is used to determine whether the symbol 5R time-saving big hit or the symbol 5R no time-saving big hit is determined. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the pattern 5R time saving jackpot and the pattern 5R no time saving jackpot in this embodiment is 1/199. Similarly, the big hit determination value described in FIG. 5B is used for the determination of the small hit. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1/7.35.

The big hits via small hits in this embodiment include 11 (10) R time-saving big hits via small hits and 6 (5) R time-saving big hits via small hits, which differ in the number of rounds in the big hits. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment includes a symbol 5R time-saving big hit and a symbol 5R time-saving big hit directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The jackpot with symbol 5R time saving is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened five times (5R). The symbol 5R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the big prize opening is opened five times (5R). In the 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning opening is actually 10 times. I feel categorical. Via small win 6 (5) R time saving big win, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on the condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the prize winning device is opened for 6 rounds, the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big prize opening is the same jackpot type as the pattern 5R short-time jackpot.

The conditions for ending the time saving state after the big hit with the pattern 5R time saving are the same as the conditions explained in FIG. That is, as a condition for ending the time saving state after the big hit with the pattern 5R time saving, the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special pattern is 1 time, and the total number of times of fluctuation display times of the first special design and the second special design Two conditions are set, one is the termination condition that the number of times is five. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

Symbol 5R time saving and time saving state after the big hit is the end condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special pattern is 1 time, and the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special design and the second special design is 5 times. is the same as the time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot described in FIG. The reason for this is that, just after the start of the time saving state, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established, a maximum of four first start winnings can be stored before the jackpot game state. To make it possible to reliably execute one-time variable display of a second special symbol that is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to a player even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the holding information is started. . By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

After the pattern 5R short time no big hit, it shifts to a special normal state. The special normal state is a state in which only the effect performed by the effect control board 80 is different from the normal state. Therefore, the advantage to the player remains the same as in the normal state. Also, the special normal state lasts up to 30 variations. In the following description, the three big hits of the pattern 5R time-saving big hit, 11 (10) R time-saving big hit via the small hit, and 6 (5) R time-saving big hit via the small hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

34-4 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 34-4(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 34-4(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the jackpot via the jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 34-4 (B), a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination, "big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" and "no symbol 5R time reduction A big hit determination value corresponding to each "big hit" is set. In the second special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination is "big hit with symbol 5R time reduction" and "no symbol 5R time reduction A big hit determination value corresponding to each "big hit" is set. In the case of this embodiment, the "symbol 5R time-saving jackpot" and the "symbol 5R time-saving jackpot" are each selected at 50%.

In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (C), it is a numerical value to be compared with the random 2 value for the big hit type determination, "11 (10) R time reduction via small hit big hit" A big hit determination value corresponding to each of "6 (5) R time-saving and big hit via small hit" is set. However, the jackpot types determined in the jackpot type determination table via small hits are temporary jackpots linked to 11 (10) R time-saving big hits and 6 (5) R time-saving big hits. It is a type, and becomes invalid if V winning does not occur in the small winning game state. In the case of this embodiment, "big hit with 11 (10) R time reduction via small hit" and "big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via small hit" are each selected at 50%.

FIG. 34-5 is a diagram showing the transition of game states. FIG. 34-5 shows normal state, special normal state, big win (symbol), big win (V prize), and chance time as game states. First, when winning the "symbol 5R time saving jackpot" or "symbol 5R time saving jackpot" in the normal state, the game shifts to a jackpot (symbol) state. In the jackpot (symbol) state, when the "symbol 5R time-saving jackpot" ends, the game shifts to a chance time A. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the jackpot (symbol) state, when the "symbol 5R time-saving jackpot" ends, the state shifts to the above-described special normal state.

In the special normal state, when winning "big hit with symbol 5R short working hours" or "big hit without symbol 5R short working hours", it shifts to a big hit (design) state. In the special normal state, when 30 times of variable display are completed, the state is shifted to the normal state.

Chance time A is the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special symbol is 1 and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This is a state that continues until either of the two conditions, that is, the end condition that the total number of times is five, is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time A, for the second special symbol, one time reduction and four variations of the reserved information of the second special symbol, which is reserved up to four during the time reduction, are combined, and the maximum number of times is five. A change is made.

In the chance time A, when ``big win with pattern 5R time reduction'' or ``big win without pattern 5R time reduction'' is won by variable display based on the reserved information of the first special pattern, the state is shifted to the big win (pattern) state again. In the chance time A, when a small win is won and a V winning occurs, the state is shifted to a big win (via a small win) state. On the other hand, in the chance time A, if a small win is not won, or if a small win is won but no V winning occurs, the game shifts to a special normal state.

In the jackpot (via small hit) state, in the jackpot (symbol) state, when "big hit via small hit 11 (10) R time short and big hit" or "big hit via small hit 6 (5) R time short and big hit" ends, chance time Move to B.

Chance time B is the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the above-mentioned condition, after the end of "11 (10) R time-saving via small winning big hit" or "small winning 6 (5) R time-saving big hit via small winning". This state continues until either one of two conditions, that is, the ending condition that the number of times is 7 times and the ending condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is 11 times, is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time B, for the second special symbol, 7 times of time saving and 4 variations of the reserved information of the 2nd special symbol, which is held at maximum 4 during the time saving, are combined, and 11 times at maximum. A change is made.

In the chance time B, when a ``big hit with pattern 5R time saving'' or ``big win without pattern 5R time saving'' is won according to the reserved information of the first special pattern, the game machine shifts to a big win (pattern) state. In the chance time B, when a small win is won and a V win occurs, the state is shifted to a big win (via a small win) state again. On the other hand, in the chance time B, if a small win is not won, or if a small win is won but no V winning occurs, the game shifts to a special normal state.

As shown in FIG. 34-5, in this embodiment, after the end of the advantageous state, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (maximum 5 times for chance time A, maximum 11 times for chance time B) above the upper limit. If it is controlled to be in an advantageous state again before the end of the advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (chance time B) after the end of the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the special state is controlled every time an advantageous state is obtained, so that the excitement of the player can be heightened.

34-6 and 34-7 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in this embodiment. Similar to FIGS. 7 and 8, FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7 show the relationship between the specific command data for the effect control command, the command name, and the specified contents of the command.

In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, the names and contents of 8C02-8C05, A001-A004, A301-A304, C401, C402, C501 and C502 are shown in FIG. and modified from FIG. In addition, in FIG. 34-7, new commands D101 to D104 are provided in order to specify that a special normal state is provided in this embodiment and to open or close the operating port.

FIG. 34-8 shows an example of variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable display is performed in response to each of the cases where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is "losing" and the decorative pattern is displayed. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α or super reach X is executed.

FIG. 34-8 (A) shows the special figure 1 variation pattern, which is the variation pattern of the first special symbol. FIG. 34-8 (B) shows a special figure 2 variation pattern which is a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Of the special figure 1 variation patterns, P1A1-2 after the big hit with short time / non-reach (losing) is the pattern 5R with short time big hit, small hit via pattern 11 (10) R time short with big hit, and small hit via pattern 6 (5) After the end of the R time-saving jackpot, before the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established, the first special based on the first start winning reservation information that can be stored up to four before the jackpot game state It is a variation pattern when the design varies. As shown in FIG. 34-8(A), the fluctuation time of P1A1-2 is 2000 ms (2 seconds).

Also, among the special figure 2 variation patterns, P2A1-2 time saving (losing) is a variation pattern when the second special symbol to be executed first varies after the end of the time saving jackpot. As shown in FIG. 34-8(B), the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 is 60000 ms (60 seconds). In this way, the execution time (2 seconds) of the variable display that is executed based on the hold information of the first start winning after the end of the time-saving jackpot is executed based on the hold information of the second start win after the end of the advantageous state. This time is shorter than the variable display execution time (60 seconds). In addition, even during time saving, after the end of the time saving jackpot, the variation pattern other than when the second special symbol to be executed first varies is a variation pattern other than P2A1-2.

The variable time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is also the time to make the number of pending items 4 in the time saving state. The period during which P2A1-2 fluctuates is the period from the start to the end of variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, and the number of pending numbers stored by the second pending storage buffer. This is an example of the predetermined period for making the number four. During one predetermined period, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state a plurality of times (three times in this embodiment). That is, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be open during the entire predetermined period.

In this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (hereinafter also referred to as "open state notification"). In addition, in the present embodiment, in a predetermined period after the end of the time-saving jackpot, promotion notification is performed to prompt the winning of game media to the variable winning ball device 15 . FIG. 34-9(A) is a diagram showing an example of open state notification and promotion notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9(A), the acceleration notification is executed by temporarily stopping the acceleration notification symbol on the middle reel. Since this promotion notification is not notified unless the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is also an open state notification. The arrows drawn on the right and left reels indicate that the reels are moving in the direction of the arrows. Also, the middle reel is an example of the first movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 . In this way, by temporarily stopping the promotional notification pattern as the notification mode, the interest of the player can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the variable display of the identification information to be executed first after the time saving jackpot to the end, the number of reservations stored by the second reservation storage buffer is the second reservation storage When the maximum number of pieces of pending information that can be stored in the buffer, which is four, is reached, an arrival notification indicating that the maximum number has been reached is executed. FIG. 34-9(B) is a diagram showing an example of arrival notification. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9(B), the arrival notification is executed by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The arrows drawn on the left reel and middle reel indicate that the reels are moving in the direction of the arrow. Also, the right reel is an example of a second movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 .

As shown in FIG. 34-9 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the middle reel when it shifts to the fluctuation time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2, and is stored by the second pending storage buffer When the reserved number reaches four, the right reel is stopped. According to such a configuration, the player can be visually notified by the movable body that the predetermined period has elapsed and that the second number has been reached.

The open state notification and promotion notification include the above-described voice notification ("Aim for M") in addition to the notification by the reel. The voice notification is made when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state during the predetermined period. In addition, the open state notification and promotion notification include notification of turning on the electric tuning lamp 68SH016 to make the variable winning ball device 15 stand out (hereinafter also referred to as "promotion lamp notification"). Furthermore, for the open state notification and promotion notification, the board surface lamp 68SH015 is turned off (hereinafter also referred to as "board surface light off"), so that the light from the electric tube lamp 68SH016 is made relatively bright. There is also a light-off notification that makes it stand out.

Whether or not these various notifications are executed changes depending on the number of reserved second special symbols. Furthermore, depending on whether or not a specific period (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, which is half the variation time of 60 seconds for P2A1-2) has passed since the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the time-saving jackpot has started also change. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100, when the number of reservations stored by the second reservation storage buffer is 0 to 3, when it is 4, and whether or not a specific period has elapsed, the notification mode is different. . In this embodiment, different notification modes mean different combinations of voice notification, acceleration lamp notification, and turning off of the board. Further, the specific period is a period for notifying the player that the remaining time during which the variable winning ball device 15 can start and win a prize is running short.

FIG. 34-10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of reservations and the notification mode. FIG. 34-10 shows execution conditions for voice notification, acceleration lamp notification, and turning off the board. In FIG. 34-10, a circle indicates execution and a cross indicates no execution. The voice notification is performed regardless of whether or not the specific period has elapsed when the number of pending calls is 0 to 3, and is not performed when the number of pending calls is 4. The acceleration ramp notification is performed for the entire period of the predetermined period. Turning off the board surface is executed when the reserved number is 0 to 3 and after a specific period has elapsed, and is not executed when the reserved number is 4 or before the specific period has elapsed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification mode is different between when the number of pending items is 0 to 3 and when the number is 4. When the number of reserved balls is 0 to 3, the number of reserved balls does not reach 4, so at least the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed to urge the player to start the variable winning ball device 15 and win a prize. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations reaches 4, the number of reservations cannot be increased more than this, so by performing only the acceleration lamp notification, the player can compare the notification mode when the number of reservations is 0 to 3. It is a notification mode that is difficult for the operator to recognize. As a result, the notification that is easy to recognize is changed to the notification that is difficult to recognize, so that the player can more surely recognize that the reserved number has reached four, and the game medium is shot when the reserved number is four. You can make it so that you are not conscious of it. In this case, the player can stop shooting the game media by, for example, letting go of the hitting operation handle 5 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 3 and a specific period has passed, all of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the turning off of the board surface are performed, so that the player can be more strongly informed that the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state. It is possible to appeal to encourage the winning of game media to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. As described above, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the promotion notification is executed to prompt the winning of the game media to the variable winning ball device 15, and furthermore, during the predetermined period, the number of stored reservation information is increased. , when the upper limit of 4 pieces of pending information that can be stored in the second pending storage buffer is reached, an arrival notification indicating that the upper limit has been reached is executed. According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Specifically, the player can firmly enjoy the lottery with the second special symbol.

Each notification described above will be described using a timing chart. FIG. 34-11 is a timing chart showing modes of "audio notification", "acceleration lamp notification", "board lamp", "arrival effect", "middle reel", and "right reel" during time saving. Among these, the "arrival effect" is an effect in which an arrival notification is performed by voice when the number of pending items reaches four, but as described later, it is possible to notify in a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. be. FIG. 34-11 shows, as an example, a timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after a time-saving jackpot is zero. Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol does not occur before the variation of the second special symbol. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 34-11, the number of pending items is 3 before the specific period has elapsed, and the number of pending items is 4 after the specific period has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 34-11, when the time-saving jackpot ends and the variation display of the second special symbol starts, the variation of the second special symbol starts according to the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above. Incidentally, in FIG. 34-11, it is simply drawn so that the variation starts immediately after the big win is finished, but in reality, after the big win is finished, the display result of the normal pattern becomes the winning, and the variable winning ball device 15 is started. When winning, the variation of the second special symbol starts according to the variation pattern of P2A1-2.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and acceleration lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the acceleration notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the acceleration notification symbol, and the right reel is rotating. there is In this state, the number of reserved items becomes 3 before the specific period expires. Section A is from the start of fluctuation to the end of the specific period. When the specific period expires, since the number of pending cards has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the reserved number becomes four, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the voice notification, turns on the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The temporary stop of the arrival notification pattern is performed over 14 seconds. Therefore, when 14 seconds have elapsed since the arrival notification symbol was temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Also, when the number of reserved characters is four, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an arrival effect.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the acceleration lamp notification and stops all the reels. Next, a description will be given of aspects of various notifications and the like in the timing chart described with reference to FIG. 34-11.

FIG. 34-12 is a diagram showing the aspect of the variable display device, the aspect of the voice notification output from the speaker 27, the aspect of the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the sections A and B and the achievement effect. FIG. 34-12(A) is a diagram showing the variable display device, voice notification, variable winning ball device 15 and board lamp 68SH015 in section A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 34-12(A), in the variable display device, the acceleration notification symbol on the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right and left reels are rotating. "Aim for M!" Also, since the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the area around the variable winning ball device 15 is illuminated by the board lamp 68SH015.

FIG. 34-12(B) is a diagram showing the variable display device, voice notification, variable winning ball device 15 and board lamp 68SH015 in section B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 34-12(B), in the variable display device, the acceleration notification symbol on the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right and left reels are rotating. "Aim for M!" Therefore, the variable display device and the voice notification are the same as those in section A. The difference is that the board surface lamp 68SH015 is turned off. By turning off the board lamp 68SH015, the surroundings of the variable winning ball device 15 become dark, the variable winning ball device 15 becomes easier to recognize, and the player is prompted to start the variable winning ball device 15 and win a prize. can. Thus, in the present embodiment, when the specific period shorter than the predetermined period has passed, when the number of pieces of pending information has not reached four, the effect control microcomputer 100 will Notification is made in a more easily recognizable notification mode than in the notification mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

FIGS. 34-12 (C) and (D) are diagrams showing the state of the variable display device, sound, and variable winning ball device 15 and board lamp 68SH015 when the number of reserved balls is four. The reason why two figures are used is that if it is determined that the variable display of the identification information is executed first after the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state, it is in a specific manner different from the notification manner of the arrival notification. This is to be notified. Specifically, when the first variable display of the second special symbol after the time-saving jackpot is controlled to the time-saving jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as "holding group"), the output voice etc. differs depending on whether it is not. .

34-12 (C) and (D) have in common that when the number of reserved symbols reaches four, the arrival notification symbols on the right reel are temporarily stopped. Then, when there is no holding group, as shown in FIG. 34-12(C), the loudspeaker 27 announces "Arrival" as an arrival effect. Also, the board surface lamp 68SH015 lights in the same manner as in section A. Thus, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by temporarily stopping the identification information as the notification mode.

On the other hand, if there is a group on hold, "Congratulations" is announced from the speaker 27 as shown in FIG. 34-12(D). Also, the board surface lamp 68SH015 lights up in a rainbow color unlike in the section A. Thus, in this embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, the effect control microcomputer 100, the arrival notification Notification is made in a specific manner (“congratulations”) different from the notification manner. According to such a configuration, the promotion notification can prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period, and can notify that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state according to the specific mode, thus exhilarating the player. can heighten your senses.

Thus, in this embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, in a specific manner different from the notification manner of arrival notification inform. According to such a configuration, the promotion notification can prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period, and can notify that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state according to the specific mode, thus exhilarating the player. can heighten your senses.

The timing chart explained in FIG. 34-11 shows the timing chart when the number of reserved first special symbols after the big hit with time saving is 0, but the number of reserved first special symbols is 1 after the big hit with time saving. There may be a case where the reserved number of the second special symbols is 0 with more than 1. Therefore, the timing chart in the case where the number of reserved first special symbols after the time-saving jackpot is one or more and the number of reserved second special symbols is zero will be described.

FIG. 34-13 is a timing chart showing modes of "audio notification", "right-handed voice notification", "acceleration lamp notification", "board lamp", "arrival effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". be. Among these, the new "right-handed voice notification" is a notification that outputs a sound such as "Right-handed!" and instructs right-handed. In the example shown in FIG. 34-13, the number of pending items is 3 before the specified period has elapsed, and the number of pending items is 4 after the specified period has elapsed. Thus, in this embodiment, during execution of the variable display executed based on the suspension information stored in the first suspension storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, another promotion notification different from the promotion notification ("right stroke !”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute another prompting notification according to the short variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 34-13, when the time-saving jackpot ends, the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 and the number of reserved first special symbols is one or more, so the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. be started. Simultaneously with the start of this variable display, right-handed voice notification is started. On the other hand, while the first special symbol is fluctuating, the voice notification ("Aim for M") is not performed, but the acceleration lamp notification is performed and the board lamp 68SH015 is lit.

Thus, in this embodiment, during the execution of the variable display that is executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, a right-handed voice notice different from the promotion notice by the voice notice is given. Run. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute another prompting notification according to the short variable display time.

When the display result of the normal pattern becomes a win during the variation of the first special pattern and the variable winning ball device 15 is started and won, the reserved number of the second special pattern becomes one. When the variation of the first special symbol is completed, the variation of the second special symbol that has been suspended by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 starts.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and acceleration lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the acceleration notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the acceleration notification symbol, and the right reel is rotating. there is In this state, the number of reserved items becomes 3 before the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of pending cards has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the reserved number becomes four, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the voice notification, turns on the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. When 14 seconds have elapsed since the arrival notification symbol was temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Also, when the number of reserved characters is four, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs an arrival effect.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the acceleration lamp notification and stops all the reels.

In this embodiment, a reel is used for the variable display device. The reel is rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, but if the reel motor 68SH010 is rotated or stopped within a short period of time, the moment of inertia of the load of the reel or the like may cause delay or advance, and the reel motor 68SH010 may be out of step. Therefore, in order to ensure the reel stop operation time, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time (specific time) of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, the number of pending information stored by the second pending storage buffer is , when the number reaches 4, the arrival notification is performed by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information.

This is because the arrival notification symbols are temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, so that the reels are rotated and stopped within a short period of time. For example, when the remaining time is 14.5 seconds and the number of reserved pieces reaches 4, the arrival notification pattern is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds and then the rotation is started. 5 seconds. Therefore, it will stop after 0.5 second from rotation, and the rotation and stop will be performed within a short period of time.

A timing chart when the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less and the number of pending items reaches four will be described.

FIG. 34-14 is a timing chart showing modes of "audio notification", "acceleration lamp notification", "board lamp", "arrival effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". In the example shown in FIG. 34-14, the pending number is 3 before the specific period elapses, and the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, and the pending number is 4.

As shown in FIG. 34-14, when the time-saving jackpot ends and the variation display of the second special symbol starts, the variation of the second special symbol starts according to the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above.

At the start of fluctuation, voice notification and acceleration lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is lit, the middle reel rotates to the acceleration notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the acceleration notification symbol, and the right reel is rotating. there is In this state, the number of reserved items becomes 3 before the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of pending cards has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the board lamp 68SH015.

After that, when the remaining number is 15 seconds or less and the pending number becomes 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, turns on the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not temporarily stop the arrival notification symbol on the right reel, but keeps rotating it, but performs the arrival effect. Thus, in this embodiment, when the remaining time of the predetermined period is equal to or less than the specific time, the number of pending information stored in the second pending storage buffer When the upper limit number of four is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not temporarily stop the identification information, and executes arrival notification by voice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the arrival notification while ensuring the stop operation time of the reel.

After that, when the predetermined period expires, the effect control microcomputer 100 terminates the acceleration lamp notification and stops all the reels. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform the arrival notification while ensuring the stop operation time of the reel.

Next, processing for realizing the above-described embodiment will be described using a flowchart. In this embodiment, in the main board 31, such as timer interrupt processing and special symbol process processing in the timer interrupt processing of FIG. is processed in the same way as In the following, among the processes performed in the present embodiment, such as the special symbol stop process, processes different from the processes described above will be described using flowcharts.

FIG. 34-15 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing in this embodiment.

In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control processing of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. When it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. In addition, a design determination designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Then, when the jackpot flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

When the jackpot flag is set, such as when it is determined that the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot or the symbol 5R no time-saving jackpot is determined, the CPU 56 determines the time-saving flag that is set when controlled to the time-saving state. When the flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and when the special state flag is set, the special state flag is reset (68SH001), and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines Depending on the type of the jackpot, a command (jackpot start designation command) of either the jackpot start 1 designation command or the jackpot start 2 designation command (jackpot start designation command) is transmitted (S135).

As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot is the pattern 5R time-saving jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of the jackpot is the jackpot with symbol 5R short working hours, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the jackpot type corresponds to is determined based on data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

Also, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time during which the effect display device 9 notifies that the big win has occurred) is set in the big winning hole control timer (S136). Thereafter, in the pre-opening processing for the large winning opening, the large winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large winning opening is opened and the round is started.

In addition, according to the jackpot type specified by the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each jackpot type stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times ), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), etc. are set in a predetermined storage area (S137). Of these data, the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (S138) to a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305), and the process is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to the big winning opening pre-opening process.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set in the aforementioned S133, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hit open pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of times of opening including the setting of the small hit open control timer used for the small hit open control (for example, 5 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 second), and data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time between openings are set in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing is terminated. As a result, the special symbol process shifts to small hit opening pre-processing.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is checked whether the time saving flag indicating the time saving state by the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). In S142, when the time saving flag is not set, it is not in the time saving state, so the process proceeds to 68SHS005 which will be described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, it means that it is in the time saving state. The total time saving number counter as counting means is updated by subtracting -1 (S143).

The total time saving number counter to be subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when it is controlled to the first time saving state after the big hit with 5R pattern time saving in the jackpot end processing of FIG. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big win of a type other than the big win without pattern time saving, it is set to 11 times by S168, and is subtracted and updated by S143 every time the variation display as the result of the losing display is executed once. . The total number of time saving counter is used to determine both whether or not the conditions for ending the first time saving state are satisfied and whether or not the conditions for ending the second time saving state are satisfied.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol based on whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" (S145). At S145, when it is time to end the variable display of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148, which will be described later. On the other hand, at S145, when it is time to end the variable display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (S146). The special figure 2 time-saving number counter that is subtracted and updated in S146 is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state after the end of the big hit game. The special figure 2 time reduction counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time reduction state in the jackpot end processing of FIG. 14, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time reduction state be done. The special figure 2 time reduction number counter is subtracted and updated each time the variable display that results in the display result that the second special symbol is lost is executed by S146.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter updated in S146 has become "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter becomes "0", when one of the end conditions of the first time saving state is established, or one of the end conditions of the second time saving state is established Since it is time, it progresses to S149 mentioned later in order to end the 1st time-saving state or the 2nd time-saving state in execution. On the other hand, in S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter is not "0", to check whether one other end condition of the end condition of the first time saving state is satisfied Then, the process proceeds to S148.

In S148, based on the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the end condition of the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed is satisfied Then, it is checked whether or not the count value of the total time saving number counter updated by subtraction in S143 has become "0" (S148). In S148, when the count value of the total time saving counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S152 which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time saving number counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

S149 and S150 are the first time saving state and the second time saving state, respectively. Executed to end the first time saving state or second time saving state being executed when it is determined that the total number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the number of times of the end condition. .

In S149, the time saving flag that has been set is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set time reduction number counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to completion of the time saving condition based on the variable display frequency in the time saving state, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151).

In 68SHS003, further processing for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS002). Then, a special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SH003), a special normal counter indicating the remaining number of special normal states is set to 30 (68SH004), and the process proceeds to S152.

In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special design process shifts to special design normal processing.

In S142 described above, when the time saving flag is not set, it is not in the time saving state, so it is checked whether it is in the special normal state (68SH005). When 68SH005 indicates that the state is not the special normal state, the process proceeds to S152. When 68SH005 is in the special normal state, the special state counter is updated by subtracting -1 (68SH006). At 68SH007, it is confirmed whether or not the special normal counter is 0 (68SH007). When the special normal counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S152. When the special normal counter is 0, a process for transmitting a special normal state end command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS008), and the process proceeds to S152.

In such a special symbol stop process, by S142 to S151, when in the first time saving state, execution of the second special symbol one time loss fluctuation display, and a total of 5 of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When either of the execution of the time difference fluctuation display is established, the process of terminating the first time saving state is performed. Further, according to S142 to S151, when the second time-saving state, the execution of the second special symbol 7 times of loss variation display, and the execution of the loss variation display of a total of 11 times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When one of the conditions is established, a process for terminating the second time saving state is performed.

FIG. 34-16 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process in this embodiment. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer that was set before the jackpot end process was executed (68SHS101). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed (68SHS102). If it has not passed, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has passed, it is confirmed whether or not the ending jackpot type is the 5R short-time jackpot based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 in this jackpot game state. (68SHS103).

When the type of jackpot to end is the 5R time-saving jackpot, a process for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS104). Then, a special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SHS105), a special normal counter indicating the remaining number of special normal states is set to 30 (68SHS106), and the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

At 68SHS107, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (68SHS107) in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and the process is terminated. Thereby, the special design process shifts to special design normal processing.

When the type of the jackpot to be terminated by 68SHS103 is not the 5R time-saving jackpot with symbols, it is checked whether the type of the jackpot to be terminated is the 5R time-saving jackpot (S163). When the type of the jackpot to end is a big hit with a pattern 5R time saving, in order to control to the first time saving state, as a condition for ending the first time saving state, "1" is set to the special figure 2 time saving counter (second special symbol (corresponding to 1 time of fluctuation display) data is set (S164), and data of "5" (corresponding to 5 times of total fluctuation display of the 1st special design and the 2nd special design) is set in the total time reduction counter (S165) . Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

When the type of jackpot to be terminated by S163 is not the jackpot with pattern 5R short working hours, the type of jackpot to be finished is the jackpot type other than the jackpot with pattern 5R short working hours and the big hit without pattern 5R short working hours, and control is performed to the second short time state. In order to do so, as a condition for ending the second time saving state, set the data of "7" (corresponding to one time fluctuation display of the second special symbol) to the special figure 2 time saving number counter (S167), and set the total time saving number counter to " 11” (corresponding to the total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 times) is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

In S170, in order to control to the 1st time saving state or the 2nd time saving state, a time saving flag is set (S170). When controlling to the 1st time saving state, a 1st time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to a 2nd time saving state, a 2nd time saving flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

As a result, after the big win game state with symbol 5R short working hours is finished, the state is controlled to the first short time state, and after the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the big hit of the symbol 5R short time and the big hit without pattern 5R time short, is controlled to the second short time state. be done. Then, the end conditions for each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state are defined individually by the number of fluctuation display times of only the second special design and the total number of fluctuation display opening times of the first special design and the second special design. be.

In such a jackpot end process, S164 and S165 perform one-time losing variation display of the second special pattern, the first special pattern and the second special pattern after the jackpot game state of the pattern 5R time-saving jackpot is completed. A setting is made to control to the first time-saving state until either of the execution of a total of 5 times of deviation fluctuation display of the pattern is established. In addition, through S167 and S168, after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot type other than the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot and the symbol 5R no time-saving jackpot, execution of the second special symbol seven times of loss variation display, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A setting is made to control to the second time-saving state until either of the execution of a total of 11 times of loss fluctuation display of 2 special symbols is established.

Next, when controlling the variable winning ball device 15 to the open state, a process of transmitting control information (operating opening open command) indicating control to the open state to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 34-17 is a flow chart showing the time-saving first-time fluctuation process for transmitting the operation opening command to the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. 34-17 is included in the special symbol variation process (S303 in FIG. 10).

In the first time-saving process during fluctuation, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is time to open the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS201). When it is the operation opening timing, the operation opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS202), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS203), and the process is finished.

When it is not the operating opening opening timing in 68SHS201, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is the operating opening closing timing for closing the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS204). When it is the operation opening closing timing, the operation opening closing command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS205), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS206), and the processing is finished. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be open a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and when controlled to be open, it is controlled to be open. Control information is transmitted to the microcomputer 100 for production control.

FIG. 34-18 is a flow chart showing small hit end processing (S310) in this embodiment. In the process after the end of the small hit, the CPU 56 updates the V winning valid period timer by subtracting -1 (S441), and confirms whether or not the V winning valid period timer has timed out (timer value=0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when the V winning is already detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is operated to determine whether or not the V winning caused by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. is turned on (S444). If it is not turned on in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is ON in S444, it means that V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and a V winning flag indicating that V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, a process for transmitting a V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

When the V winning valid period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small winning has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V win flag is set in S448, it is determined that the game is a big win, and the big win flag is set (S449).

In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, in the small winning game state, if the player hits to the right in accordance with the notification to promote hitting to the right, which will be described later, the game ball is allowed to enter the V-judgment winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. , and the game ball that has entered the V judgment winning device 87 always V wins in the V winning area 870, so that the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, a big hit flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to a big win game state.

Next, the CPU 56 stores the data indicating the jackpot type via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the fact that it has been determined that the jackpot will be a regular jackpot due to the occurrence of the V prize. formally stored in (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451), and the special normal flag is reset (68SH304).

Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command or a jackpot start 4 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the jackpot game state is started. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (S453).

In addition, referring to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, depending on the jackpot type, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times or 5 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time (round The opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the closing time of the big winning opening between the openings, is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, data of the number of times of opening is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (S455) to a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (S305), and the process is terminated. As a result, when V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the state is shifted to the big winning game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, since the big win game state does not occur, the data indicating the big win via the small win stored in the big win provisional type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special normal state specifying command is executed. to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS301). Then, a special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SHS302), a special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special normal state is set to 30 (68SHS303), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the normal processing (S300) is updated (S457), and the processing ends. As a result, when the V prize does not occur in the small winning game state, the game does not shift to the big winning game state.

Next, processing on the side of the performance control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 34-19 is a flow chart showing the time reduction processing. 34-19 is included in the effect symbol change process (S802 in FIG. 19). Further, the time-saving time variation processing indicates processing during the variable display of the first second special symbol after the big hit with time-saving.

In the time reduction processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the fourth reserved game has started and won (68SHS401). This can be confirmed by the second reserved storage number specification command. When the fourth reserved game wins, the middle reel, which has been temporarily stopped, starts to rotate (68SHS402). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining time is less than or equal to the specific time (68SHS403). When the remaining time is less than or equal to the specified time, the process proceeds to 68SHS405. When the remaining time is not equal to or less than the specified time, the arrival notification symbol on the right reel is temporarily stopped (68SHS404).

The effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not there is a holding group (68SHS405). Command C2XX can be used to check whether or not there is a reserved run. When there is a group on hold, "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 27, and the processing is terminated. When there is no holding group, "Arrival" is output from the speaker 27, and the process is terminated.

In 68SHS401, if the fourth reserved game has not won a starting prize, it is confirmed whether or not a specific period has passed (68SHS408). When the specific period has passed, it is confirmed whether the number of reserved items is less than 4 (68SHS409). When the reserved number is less than 4, the board surface lamp 68SH015 is turned off (68SHS410), and the process ends.

In 68SHS408, if the specified period has not passed, it is checked whether or not the operating port open command has been received (68SHS411). If the operating port open command has not been received, the process is terminated. When the operating port open command is received, it is checked whether or not the number of reservations is less than four (68SHS412). If the pending number is not less than 4, the process ends. If the number of pending calls is less than 4, voice notification is given (68SHS413), and the process ends. Thus, in this embodiment, by receiving the operation opening command, it is notified that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. According to such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 can reliably notify by the operation opening command transmitted from the CPU 56 that controls the variable winning device.

[Main effects of characteristic part 068SH]
(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) capable of playing games,
A variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15 or the like) that can change between a closed state in which game media cannot win or is difficult to win and an open state in which game media can win more easily than in the closed state;
a variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays identification information based on the winning of a game medium in the variable winning device and derives and displays a display result;
pending storage means (second pending storage buffer, etc.) for storing pending information about variable display that has not yet started;
notification means (such as the effect control microcomputer 100) for notifying that the variable prize winning device is in the open state when the variable prize winning device is in the open state;
with
When the number of pending information stored by the pending storage means is a first number (0 to 3, etc.), and when the number is a second number (4, etc.) greater than the first number , the notification mode is different (as shown in FIG. 34-10, when the number of reservations is 0 to 3, voice notification and acceleration lamp notification, or voice notification, acceleration lamp notification, and board extinguishing, on the other hand, the number of reservations A game machine characterized in that only the acceleration lamp notification is given when there are four.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
The notification mode for the second number is a mode that is harder to recognize than the notification mode for the first number (as shown in FIG. 34-10, when the pending number is 0 to 3, voice Notification and acceleration lamp notification, or voice notification, acceleration lamp notification, and board light off, On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 4, only the acceleration lamp notification harder to recognize than individually).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from being conscious of shooting game media when the number of pending information is the second number.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
A predetermined period (30 seconds, etc.) is provided for causing the number of pending information stored by the pending storage means to be the second number,
A movable body control means for controlling a first movable body (middle reel, etc.) and a second movable body (left reel, etc.) different from the first movable body,
The movable body control means causes the first movable body to operate (stop operation, etc.) when the predetermined period has elapsed, and when the number of pending information stored by the pending storage means reaches the second number. to operate the second movable body (stopping operation, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the player can be visually notified by the movable body that the predetermined period has elapsed and that the second number has been reached.

(4) The gaming machine according to (3),
A variable winning device control means (CPU56 etc.) for controlling the variable winning device is provided,
The variable prize winning device control means controls the variable prize winning device to be in an open state a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and controls the variable prize device to be in the open state when the variable prize winning device is to be controlled to the open state. Sending information (operation opening command, etc.) to the notification means (68SHS202, etc. in FIG. 34-17),
By receiving the control information, the notification means notifies that the variable winning device is open (YES at 68SHS411 in FIG. 34-19, YES at 68SHS412 and 68SHS413).

According to such a configuration, the notification means can reliably perform notification according to the control information transmitted from the variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device.

(5) The gaming machine according to (3) or (4),
After the transition to the predetermined period (section A in FIG. 34-12, etc.), when a specific period (such as 30 seconds) shorter than the predetermined period has passed, the number of pending information stored by the pending storage means is When the second number is not reached, the notification means notifies in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode before the specific period elapses (board lamp in section B shown in FIG. 34-12 (B) extinguishing the variable winning ball device 15 to make the notification in an easily recognizable notification mode, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, regarding the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called type 1 gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the variable display results of special symbols and performance symbols, and a variable winning ball device provided in the game area Combined with a gaming machine (so-called type 2 gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in (so-called accessory) A gaming machine (a so-called one-and-two mixed machine) has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a first-class gaming machine.

Specifically, since the first type of gaming machine has a hold, by applying the characteristic part 068SH, when the number of stored hold information is the first number (0 to 3), By making the notification mode different between when the second number (four) is greater than the first number and applying the feature part 069SH, the number of pieces of stored pending information in a predetermined period is reduced to the second number. When the upper limit number (4) of pending information that can be stored in the pending storage buffer is reached, an arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number has been reached is executed. Also, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of pieces of hold information is set to four, but the number may be set to another number such as eight.

In the present embodiment, a sound such as "arrival" is output as the arrival notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrival notification may be a minute sound output when the game control board transmits a command and the effect control board receives the command.

In this embodiment, reels are used as the first movable body and the second movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first movable body and the second movable body may be accessories. As the first movable accessory, for example, an accessory that appears when a predetermined period of time has elapsed may be used, and as the second movable accessory, for example, an accessory that appears when the second number is reached may be used. may be used. In any case, the notification using the movable body can increase the variation of the notification, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

In the present embodiment, 1 minute is used as the predetermined period, 30 seconds as the specific period, and 15 seconds as the specific time, but they are not limited to these. The predetermined period, the specific period, and the specific time may be appropriately determined for each model (for example, the number of times the variable winning device is open, the time, etc.).

In this embodiment, the variable display device is a drum type using reels, but it is not limited to this, and a variable display device using liquid crystal, organic EL, project mapping, or the like may be used.

In the present embodiment, an embodiment has been described in which a winning to the variable winning ball device 15 is urged and an arrival notification is given. It is not limited to a variable winning device that can be changed to an open state that is easy to open, but it may be a winning ball device that can always win a prize like the first start winning port 13 . In this case, when the variable prize winning device is in the open state, the notification means may be a notification means for notifying the prize winning device in place of the notification means for notifying that the variable prize winning device is in the open state. good. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player that he or she wants to win a prize, and the player can clearly recognize that the player should aim at the winning ball device by the notification, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period.

In the present embodiment, the notification mode is different between when the first number and when the second number is larger than the first number, but the notification mode is changed (for example, in stages) according to the number of reservations You may do so. That is, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 1, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 2, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 3, and the notification mode when the number of reservations is 4 may be different from each other. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player of winning a prize, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged and preventing the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to

In this embodiment, the notification mode is different depending on the combination of sound, lamp, and reel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lamps, sounds, and reels may individually have different notification modes, such as changing the color of the lamp, changing the sound, or changing the motion of the reel. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player of winning a prize, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged and preventing the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to Furthermore, the remaining time in the predetermined period may be displayed digitally or as a bar.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to deal with gaming machines with diversified specs and game methods, the conventional gaming machine notifies only right-handed and left-handed players. It is possible to solve the problem that it was difficult to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage or prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage or to prevent the player from losing an advantageous right within a predetermined period, but also to prevent only the player who has been playing from the past Moreover, since even beginners can easily enjoy the game, it is possible to obtain the effect of promoting an increase in the number of players.

[Main effects of characteristic portions 244F and 245F]
(1) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed Since it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the remaining number of times, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed Since it is possible to perform display control without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of times of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state without making the player feel uncomfortable.

(3) As shown in Figure 33-1 (C) to (E), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed , by erasing the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the erased remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to control the display so that the remaining number of times is not displayed. , the display of the remaining number of times is erased and re-displayed to suggest that the display of the remaining number of times will not be updated. It can be displayed without giving a sense of incongruity.

(4) As shown in Figure 33-3 (B) to (D), when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed By changing the color of the remaining number of hours saving image 96 and displaying it, an effect is given to suggest that the display of the remaining number of hours is not updated, so that the remaining number of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further enhanced. It can be displayed without giving a sense of incompatibility to the person.

(5) As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special symbol remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, By performing display control to superimpose a predetermined image that suggests that the remaining number of times is not updated, such as the lock image 96A, on the remaining number of times of working hours image 96, the remaining number of variable display that can be performed during the time saving state is The display can be performed without making the player feel even more uncomfortable.

(6) In the time saving state, (B) ~ (G) of Figure 33-1, S927, S928 of Figure 33-2 (B), (B) ~ (G) of Figure 33-3, Figure 33-4 As shown in S927, S928, etc. of (B), at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the time saving remaining The second special figure remaining number of times is displayed as the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, in (H) of FIG. 33-1, S927 and S929 of FIG. 33-2 (B), (H) of FIG. As shown, at least, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the number of time reduction remaining times. , the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

(7) As shown in [First Display Control Limitation Example], the total remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the number of times the second variable display is performed until the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times is less than two times, even if the first variable display is executed, the display control is restricted so as not to display the remaining number of times. Since the remaining number of times is displayed, it is possible to display the remaining number of times of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state without making the player feel uncomfortable.

(8) As shown in FIG. 33-6 [Example of specific notification], based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display in the time saving state has exceeded the specific number of times, the first In a game in which the condition for ending the time saving state is defined by the total number of variable displays and the second variable display, the specific notification can prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

(9) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, etc., as shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), a change effect is executed according to the number of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the performance mode of the specific performance, the amusement of the game can be improved by the fun of the performance.

[Main Modifications Regarding Characteristic Portions 244F and 245F]
(1) Regarding the first display control example described above, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the remaining time saving number is not displayed As an example of display control to do so, (a) display control not to display the remaining number of time saving by changing the remaining number of time saving image 96 to another image such as a character image, or (b) Other display control such as display control for not displaying the remaining number of working hours by displaying the remaining number of working hours image 96 so as to cover it with another image such as a character image may be performed.

(2) Regarding the second display control example described above, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is not updated. As an example of display control, (a) the display of the remaining number of time reductions is updated by temporarily changing the remaining number of time reduction image 96 to another image such as a character image and redisplaying the remaining number of time reduction image 96 that has not been updated. (b) Display control that does not update the remaining number of time reductions image 96 by returning to the original display after subtracting and updating the remaining number of time reductions image 96, (c) Display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions image 96 Display control that suggests not to update by changing the size (for example, changing to an extremely small image) and does not update, or (d) A message to the effect that the remaining number of times of saving time is not updated near the image of the remaining number of times of saving time image 96 may be displayed to suggest non-update and other display control such as non-update display control may be performed.

(3) Regarding the first display control example described above, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is erased. As a control, (a) the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied is the second until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied When the remaining number of variable displays is exceeded, the display of the remaining number of times of shortening is erased, and the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second condition for ending the time saving state. When less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until is established, control not to erase the display of the remaining number of time saving, or (b) the first variable display until the first condition of ending the time saving state is satisfied And when the remaining number of the total number of times of the second variable display exceeds the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, the first variable display and the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied 2 When the remaining number of times of the total number of variable displays is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, the control to erase the display of the remaining number of time saving is executed. may

(4) In the first display control and the second display control, at least the total remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is equal to the number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of times of the second variable display is exceeded, the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of times of the variable display during the time saving state, and at least the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied. and when the remaining number of the total number of times of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of times of the total number of times is displayed as the remaining number of times. may have the following display controls: When the remaining total number of times exceeds the remaining number of times of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, and when the remaining number of times of the total number is less than the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied You may change the display mode of the time saving remaining frequency|count image 96 by . In that case, different display modes include different display positions, different display colors, different display sizes, different display shapes (fonts, etc.), and different display shapes (fonts, etc.). is included.

(5) As an example of the specific notification described above, the following control may be performed in addition to the control described above, or may be performed together with the control described above. A special image such as a special character image is displayed based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display to be executed is equal to or greater than a specified number of times during the time-saving state to inform the player of a disadvantageous situation. (suggestion) to control. During the time-saving state, based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display to be executed is equal to or greater than a specific number of times, the background image is changed, etc., and the image of the wide display area of the display area of the effect display device 9, which is equal to or greater than a predetermined range. is changed, control is performed to notify (suggest) that the player will be in a disadvantageous situation. Control to notify by directly displaying a message indicating that the player is in a disadvantageous situation based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display to be executed reaches a specific number or more during the time saving state. do.

(6) As for the time saving remaining number image 96, an image that can specify whether the "total remaining number" is displayed or the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed as follows. good too. (a) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the image color may be changed between when the "total remaining number" is displayed and when the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. (b) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the size of the image may be different between when the "total remaining number" is displayed and when the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed. . (c) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the shape of the image (character font, character thickness, color of characters, etc.) may be varied. (d) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, a message indicating which of the "total remaining number" and the "second special figure remaining number" is displayed may be directly displayed.

(7) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, at least the remaining number of times of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second number until the second condition is satisfied. In addition to when the remaining number of variable displays is exceeded, at least the total remaining number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is equal to the remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied. Even when it is less than the remaining number of times of the second variable display, the second special figure remaining number of times may be displayed as the time saving remaining number of times.

(8) For the time saving remaining number image 96, the total remaining number of times, which is the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied, and the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied Both the second special figure remaining number, which is the number of times of variable display, may be displayed in parallel.

(9) For [specific notification example], set a predetermined specific number of times, such as four times, during the time saving state, and execute the specific notification when the first variable display is performed for the specific number of times. I gave an example. However, not limited to this, the specific number of times set as the execution condition of the specific notification is set to the number of reserved memories (0 to 4 pieces) 9 of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state, and the number of reserved memories After the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the specific notification may be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is further executed.

(10) In the first display control and the second display control described above, an example is shown in which the display of the remaining number of times of time saving can be updated at the end of the variable display in the time saving state. However, not limited to this, in the time saving state, control may be performed so that the display of the remaining number of time saving can be updated at the start of the variable display.

[Other means configuration example 1]
The embodiments described above include the following means and configurations.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko game) that performs variable display (variable display of special symbols, effect symbols, etc.) and is controllable to an advantageous state for the player (such as a jackpot game state in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened). Machine 1, etc.),
Reservation storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, reservation storage buffer, etc.) for storing information on variable display as reservation storage information;
A specific effect executing means (production control microcomputer 100, S881 to S896 in FIG. 31, S901 to S906 in FIG. 32, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (such as the specific effect in FIG. 29),
Change production execution means (production control micro Computer 100, FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31, etc.),
The specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in response to the execution of the variable display in a specific variation pattern (such as the first variation pattern of the second special symbol after the end of the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot game state). (S881, etc. in FIGS. 30 and 31),
The change effect executing means executes the change effect according to the number of reserved storage information when the specific effect is executed (FIGS. 29(D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by the interest of the presentation.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the variable display is executed in the specific variation pattern, the promotion effect that promotes the storage of the pending storage information in the pending storage means (Fig. 29 (B) to (G) Promotion effect execution means (production control microcomputer 100, S886 in FIG. 31, etc.) for executing a winning promotion effect that displays the promotion image 9B),
The change effect executing means executes the change effect in relation to the increase in the number of reserved storage information (FIGS. 29(D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize the relationship between the change effect and the number of pending storage information.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The change effect executing means, when executing the change effect, performs a reach line number increase effect for increasing the number of lines in the reach mode formed in relation to the execution of the specific effect (Fig. 29 (D) to As in (G), the reach line increase effect, etc., in which the number of reach lines is increased by the look-ahead effect pattern 94 according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually understand the relationship between the change effect and the number of pending storage information.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
The change effect execution means increases the number of lines in the same reach mode in the reach line number increase effect (as shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), the same "7" increasing the number of reach lines in the pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the production control.

(5) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
During the reach line increase effect, a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is to be achieved (the display result of the reach line pattern corresponding to each of the reserved storage information in FIGS. 29(H) to (J) is displayed. Suggestive effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, S893 in FIG. 31, etc.) for executing a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not it will be a holding group by
The suggestive effect is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of lines in the ready-to-win state (the suggestive effect period in FIG. 30, S893 to S895 in FIG. 31, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the development and design of the production control.

(6) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The promotion effect executing means terminates the promotion effect when the number of reserved storage information reaches a predetermined value (FIGS. 29(G) and (H), S890, S891 of FIG. 31, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the decrease in interest in the game due to the effect by suppressing the promotion effect more than necessary.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by means of effects using a series of images (such as the effects of judgment effect moving images shown in FIGS. 29A to 29O). (FIGS. 29A to 29O, 883 in FIG. 31, S906 in FIG. 32, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the amusement of the game by the performance using a series of images.

[Other means configuration example 2]
The above-described embodiment further includes the following means and configurations.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable winning means (V determination winning device 87, etc.) that allows game media to enter in a predetermined state,
A specific area (V winning area 870, etc.) provided in the variable winning means and into which game media can enter;
A first state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10, etc.) for controlling to an advantageous state (big hit in symbols, etc.) based on the result of the fluctuation display;
Based on the result of the variable display, control is made to the predetermined state to allow game media to enter the specific area in the variable winning means (V winning, etc.) (small winning state, etc.), and in the predetermined state, the specific Second state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) for controlling to the advantageous state (big hit via small hit, etc.) based on the entry of the game medium into the area etc.) and
Predetermined effect means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (such as displaying a V prize aura image 95 as a effect indicating the number of rounds in FIG. 20) based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state for microcomputer 100, S842 to S844 in FIG. 26, etc.),
The predetermined state is defined as the elapse of a predetermined period (a period of repeating 0.1 seconds x 10 times of opening and closing for 1 second, etc.), or a predetermined number (10, etc.) of game media in the variable winning means. Exit based on what was entered,
After the game media have entered the specific area, the predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (as shown in FIG. The color of the V winning aura image 95 changes in the round number suggesting effect of FIG.

According to such a configuration, after the game media enter the specific area, the effect mode of the predetermined effect is changed according to the number of the game media that have entered the variable winning means, so that the effect enhances the interest of the game. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When a game medium enters the specific area in the predetermined state, an entry notification effect means (small processing for displaying the V winning image 94 of FIG. 20 in the open processing of S808 of FIG.
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect in relation to the execution of the specific effect (such as displaying a V prize aura image 95 when a V prize image 94 is displayed as shown in FIG. 20). ).

According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is executed in association with execution of the entry notification effect for notifying that the game medium has entered the specific area, so that the effect further enhances the interest of the game. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (as shown in FIGS. 20(A) to (E) and FIG. 23(A), V The winning aura image 95 can change its color step by step from white→blue→green→red→rainbow according to the number of winnings to the V judgment winning device 87, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means. The number of media can draw the player's attention.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The advantageous state is selected from among a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage (such as a plurality of types of winning types in FIG. 2),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state (FIG. 23(B)). , the selection ratio of a plurality of types of effect patterns with different gradual change patterns of the color of the V winning aura image 95 differs according to the determined number of rounds of the big win, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area in the predetermined state. By making it possible for the player to recognize the degree of advantage of the advantageous state controlled based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the attraction of the game can be further enhanced by the effect.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Reservation storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, reservation storage buffer, etc.) for storing information on variable display as reservation storage information;
Prefetching determination means (game control microcomputer 560, S1215, S1225 in FIG. 11, etc.) for determining whether or not the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state.
The predetermined effect means can change the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode ([V winning image aura color A modified example in which a holding continuous notification effect is performed by [, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the performance mode of the predetermined performance can be changed to a specific mode based on the fact that the suspension storage means contains the suspension storage information that is in an advantageous state, so that the suspension storage means is in an advantageous state. By making it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved storage information is included, the attraction of the game can be further enhanced by the effect.

Next, other effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, etc., as shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), the change effect is executed according to the number of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the performance mode of the specific performance, the amusement of the game can be improved by the fun of the performance.

(2) As shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), the change in the specific effect is executed in relation to the increase in the number of pending storage information due to the winning promotion effect. It is possible to make it possible for the player to clearly recognize the relationship between the effect and the number of reserved stored information.

(3) As shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, a reach line increase effect for increasing the number of reach lines according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information is executed. Thus, it is possible to visually understand the relationship between the change effect and the number of the second reserved storage information.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 29(D) to (G), as a change effect in the specific effect, by increasing the number of reach lines of the same "7" pattern according to the increase in the number of reserved storage information, reach mode It is possible to simplify the development and design of the performance control, such as eliminating the need to consider the performance pattern related to the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player, such as changing the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player according to the type of game. .

(5) As shown in FIG. 30, the suggestive effect period is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of reach lines, thereby facilitating the development and design of the effect control.

(6) As shown in FIGS. 29(G) and (H), the prize-winning effect is ended when the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), thereby promoting more than necessary. By suppressing the performance, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing due to the performance.

(7) As shown in FIGS. 29A to 29O, by executing a specific effect in variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by means of effects using a series of images such as judgment effect moving images, The attraction of the game can be improved by the production.

(8) A V winning aura image 95 is generated according to the number of game balls that have entered the V judgment winning device 87 after the game medium has entered the specific area by executing the round number suggesting effect as shown in FIG. Since the effect mode of the predetermined effect such as the effect of displaying is changed, the progress of the game is not delayed, and the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

(9) As shown in FIG. 20, the effect of suggesting the number of rounds by the V winning aura image 95 is executed in relation to the execution of the effect of notifying the V winning by displaying the V winning image 94. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(10) As shown in FIG. 20, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87. , the number-of-rounds suggesting performance and the number of game balls entering the V-judgment winning device 87 can attract the player's attention.

(11) As shown in FIG. 23, the number of rounds (round Since it is possible to change step by step according to the advantage of the number, the game player can recognize the number of rounds of the big win, so that the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the effect.

(12) As shown in [Modified example of holding continuous notification effect by V winning image aura color], if the continuous continuous notification effect is executed, the holding storage information that becomes the big hit in the holding storage information and the small winning Since at least one of the holding memory information is included, the production mode of the production of displaying the aura image can be changed to a specific mode, so that the holding memory division can be performed via a big hit or a small hit. By making it possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory information for the big hit is included, the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

(13) As shown in FIG. 21, when a V prize occurs in the small winning game state, at least one of the reserved storage information determined to result in a symbol jackpot or the reserved storage information determined to result in a small win. Based on the fact that one is included, it is possible to execute the holding continuous notification effect, so that the effect can improve the interest of the game.

(14) As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a plurality of sums of the pending memory information determined to be the symbol big hit and the pending memory information determined to be the small hit are stored, the pending notification effect is performed. To further improve the amusement of a game by means of a performance by allowing a player to recognize that there are a plurality of pieces of retention storage information that can become a big win when a retention continuous notification performance is executed. can be done.

(15) As shown in FIG. 21, a blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the performance period of the small winning game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to suitably execute the holding continuous notification effect for adjustment of the effect period or the like.

(16) In the pending continuous notification effect, for example, the total number of pending stored information that can be a big hit, such as "+3 BONUS" in FIG. 21(C) and "+4 BONUS" in FIG. 21(D). is less than a predetermined number (three, etc.) and when it is a predetermined number or more (four, etc.), the effect mode of the special effect to be executed is different, so that the holding continuous notification effect is executed in any effect mode. It is possible to attract the player's attention.

(17) As shown in FIG. 24, a hold is made according to the number of holding stored information that can be a big hit, such as a symbol 15R short-time big win and a 16 (15)R short-time big win via a small win, which is an advantageous number of rounds for the player. Since the ratios of execution of continuous notification performances are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to how many times the big win with the number of advantageous rounds is executed when the reserved continuous notification performance is executed.

(18) In the holding consecutive notification effect presence/absence determination table, among the jackpot types, when the total number of holding consecutive numbers of the pattern 15R short-time jackpot and 16 (15) R short-time jackpot via a small hit is 2 or more, the holding consecutive notification effect is performed. The data is set to run As a result, the player is informed that a plurality of pieces of holding memory information that can be a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the jackpot types are stored when the reservation continuous notification performance is executed. can be recognized, the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

(19) As shown in FIG. 21, based on the fact that at least one of the holding memory information determined to be a big hit in the pattern and the holding memory information determined to be a small hit is included, Since the notification performance can be executed, the entertainment of the game can be improved by the performance.

(20) As shown in FIG. 21, the number of pending memory information determined to be a big hit and the number of pending memory information determined to be a small hit are reported in a identifiable manner in the continuous pending notification performance. By making it possible for the player to specifically recognize the number of reserved stored information that is advantageous to the player, the attraction of the game can be further improved by the effect.

(21) When V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the V winning notification of FIG. A player can be made to pay attention to the performance when winning occurs.

(22) As shown in [Modified example of change in effect mode of continuous continuous notification effect], when the total number of pending memory information that becomes a big hit in the pattern and the total number of pending memory information that becomes a big hit via a small hit is more than one When the performance mode of the continuous suspension notification performance is different between when there are only a plurality of pieces of suspension storage information that become a big hit, the performance mode of the continuous suspension notification performance to be executed can be changed according to the type of the continuous suspension. , the player can be made to pay attention to which performance mode the holding continuous notification performance is executed.

(23) As shown in [Modified Example of Change in Effect Mode of Holding Continuous Notification Effect], when the rate of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first holding continuous type to the third holding continuous type. , the player can be made to pay attention to which performance mode the holding continuous notification performance is executed.

(24) As shown in [Modified example of limiting control of continuous holding notification effect], after executing the continuous holding notification effect for notifying that there are multiple holding continuous notification effects, By prohibiting the execution of the continuous suspension notification effect until all the stored information is consumed, the new execution of the continuous suspension notification effect is restricted. which can be clarified.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 33AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 33AK will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 33AK, when the second reserved memory number is accumulated when the time saving state ends, the second special symbol for the second reserved memory number accumulated even after the time saving state ends. special game is executed. If it is controlled to the small winning game state based on the special game, V winning occurs and the game is controlled to the big winning game state again, and is controlled to the time saving state again. That is, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, the probability that a so-called consecutive chance will occur increases, and if the second reserved memory number is not accumulated in the time saving state, the amount that was not accumulated (for example, the maximum 4 times), the opportunity to execute the special game of the second special symbol (opportunity for a small winning lottery to be won at about 1/7) is lost, so it is extremely disadvantageous to the player compared to when the second reserved memory number is accumulated. turn into. In the characteristic part 33AK, in order to prevent the occurrence of such a disadvantageous state, at the time of the time saving final fluctuation, the winning promotion notification (notification of accumulating the reservation) according to the second reservation memory number at that time is executed. It has become.

FIG. 35-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table in the characteristic portion 33AK. The main difference from the classification table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the pattern jackpot are provided without time reduction. In this embodiment, as the jackpot type, the pattern 5R time saving jackpot (first jackpot), pattern 5R time saving jackpot (second jackpot), small hit (first small hit) via 11 (10) R time saving jackpot, And a small hit (second small hit) via 6 (5) R time-saving big hit is provided. The numbers in parentheses for the big win via the small win indicate the number of times the variable winning ball device 20 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 35-1, the big hits via small hits in this embodiment include 11 (10) R time reduction via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the big hits, and 6 (5) R time reduction via small hits. Includes jackpot. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment includes a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot and a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot that are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

The symbol 5R time-saving jackpot (also referred to as the first jackpot) is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened five times (5R). The pattern 5R no-time-saving jackpot (also referred to as the second jackpot) is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened five times (5R).

In the 11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment prize winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big prize opening is opened 10 times (10R) under the condition of V winning. The winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of openings of the big winning opening is actually 10 times. I feel categorical. Via small hit 11 (10) The small hit that triggers the R time-saving big hit is also called the first small hit.

Via small win 6 (5) R time saving big win, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on the condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the prize winning device is opened for 6 rounds, the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big prize opening is the same jackpot type as the pattern 5R short-time jackpot. The small hit that triggers the big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via the small hit is also called the second small hit.

As a condition for ending the time saving state after the big hit with 5R time saving, the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the 2nd special pattern is 1 time, and the total number of times of fluctuation display of the 1st special pattern and the 2nd special pattern is 5 Two conditions are set, namely, a termination condition of times. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

Symbol 5R time saving and time saving state after the big hit is the end condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special pattern is 1 time, and the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special design and the second special design is 5 times. is the same as the time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot described in FIG. The reason for this is that, just after the start of the time saving state, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established, a maximum of four first start winnings can be stored before the jackpot game state. To make it possible to reliably execute one-time variable display of a second special symbol that is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to a player even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the holding information is started. . By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

In addition, after the big hit via the small win, the end condition is that the number of times the variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the variation display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 5R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In addition, after the pattern 5R time-saving no big hit, it shifts to a normal state. In the following description, the three big hits of the pattern 5R time-saving big hit, 11 (10) R time-saving big hit via the small hit, and 6 (5) R time-saving big hit via the small hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

In this embodiment, the big hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 35-2(A). Therefore, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is 1/199 when the first special symbol changes. When it is determined that the first special symbol is a big win, the big win type is determined to be the first big win or the second big win. As shown in FIG. 35-2(B), in the case of this embodiment, the "first big win" and the "second big win" are each selected at 50%. The jackpot pattern of the "first jackpot" is set to "7", and the jackpot pattern of the second jackpot is set to "3".

Similarly, small hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 35-2 (A). Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1/7.35 when the second special symbol changes. When it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, the big hit type is determined as a first small win or a second small win. As shown in FIG. 35-2(C), in the case of this embodiment, the "first small win" and the "second small win" are each selected at 50%. The jackpot pattern of the "first small win" is set to "1", and the jackpot pattern of the second jackpot is set to "5".

In addition, the hit type shown in FIG. 35-1 is an example, and in the characteristic portion 33AK, the first special symbol is set so as not to be judged as a small hit. It may be set so that it is determined to be a small hit with a probability of . Further, the second special symbol is set so as not to be judged as a big hit, but the second special symbol may be set so as to be judged as a big hit with a predetermined probability. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits, the number of types of hits, conditions for ending the time-saving state, etc. can be changed without departing from the gist of the present invention.

In this embodiment, in the variable display that is the final time of the time-saving state, a time-saving final variation pattern with a long variation display time (for example, a variation pattern with super reach) is selected. The variation display time of the time saving final variation pattern is sufficient for the second reserved storage information to accumulate to the upper limit if the right hitting is performed while the variation display based on the time saving final variation pattern is performed in the time saving state. Time is preferred. By doing so, for example, even if the time saving state ends with only one variation of the second special symbol, the second reservation memory number can be accumulated, and the second reservation memory information is not sufficiently accumulated in the time saving state. , it is possible to reduce the possibility of losing the opportunity to perform the variable display of the second special symbol, winning the small win, and losing the opportunity of the big win via the small win.

FIG. 35-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving final fluctuation process executed in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S301). In the time saving final fluctuation processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set (33AKS001).

If the time saving flag is set (33AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether it is the final change in the time saving state (33AKS002 to 33AKS004).

First, it is determined whether or not the variable display of this time is the variable display of the second special symbol (33AKS002), and if it is the variable display of the second special symbol (33AKS002; Yes), the special figure 2 time reduction number counter is "1" (33AKS003). In addition, when it is not the variable display of the second special symbol (33AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the total time reduction number counter is "1" (33AKS004).

If the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter is "1" (33AKS003; Yes), or if the count value of the total time saving number counter is "1" (33AKS004; Yes), this time fluctuation display is short Since it is the final variation in the state, the current variation pattern is determined as the time saving final variation pattern, and the setting for starting the variation based on the time saving final variation pattern is performed (33AKS005). After that, the processing at the time of time saving final fluctuation is ended.

If the time saving flag is not set (33AKS001; No), if the count value of the special 2 time saving counter is not "1" (33AKS003; No), if the total time saving counter is not "1" ( 33AKS004; No), since it is not the final change in the time saving state, the time saving final change processing is terminated. In this case, the variation pattern may be determined by a normal variation pattern determination process.

FIG. 35-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the during-fluctuation effect setting process. The effect setting process during fluctuation is executed within the effect symbol change start process (S801). In the production setting process during fluctuation, the production control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the time saving state is started from the current fluctuation display (33AKS011). Whether or not the time saving state is started from the current variable display may be determined based on the reception result of the effect control command specifying the game state, for example.

When the time-saving state is started from the current variable display (33AKS011; Yes), in the current variable display, the setting for executing the winning promotion notification is performed (33AKS012). The prize-winning notification in the characteristic part 33AK is a notification that prompts the shooting (hit ball) of a game ball to the variable prize-winning ball device 15 having the second start prize-winning port 14 . The award promotion notification is also a right-handed promotion notification, and is also a notification to encourage accumulation of the second reserved memory number. Thus, in this embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at the start of the time saving state. Thus, it is possible to inform the player of the game method (to hit to the right) in the time-saving state, and to urge the player to accumulate the second reserved memory number. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of prize-winning notification. Make settings for executing prize promotion notification in variable display.

If the time saving state is not started from this variable display (33AKS011; No), after executing the process of 33AKS012, based on the received variable pattern command and display result designation command, in this variable display It decides whether or not to execute a foretelling effect to foretell/suggest that a big hit or a ready-to-win game is to be achieved, and the mode of performance in the case of execution (33AKS013). After that, the effect setting process during fluctuation is ended.

FIG. 35-5 shows an effect mode of the winning promotion notification in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode are provided as presentation modes of the prize promotion notification. The first mode is an effect mode in which a winning promotion notification is performed by display on the effect display device 9, and the effect display device 9 displays a notification image "Aim right!". The second mode is a performance mode in which a winning promotion notification is performed by display on the performance display device 9, voice output from the speaker 27, and lighting of a lamp, and the performance display device 9 reports "Put up the hold!" An image is displayed. The third mode is a performance mode in which a winning promotion notification is performed by the display on the performance display device 9 and lighting of a lamp. The strength of the winning promotion notification (strength of promotion) is as follows: second mode>third mode>first mode. In this embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed in one of these presentation modes according to the necessity of winning promotion.

FIG. 35-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving final variation effect processing. The during-variation effect setting process is executed within the during-effect symbol change process (S802). In the time saving final variation effect processing, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the current variation display is the time saving final variation (33AKS021). In 33AKS021, it may be determined whether or not the received variation pattern command designates the time saving final variation pattern. When it is not the time saving final variation (33AKS021; No), the time saving final variation effect processing is terminated.

If it is the time saving final variation (33AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the winning promotion notification (33AKS022). In this embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at a predetermined timing of the variation display based on the time saving final variation pattern (after a predetermined time from the start of variation). In 33AKS022, it is sufficient to determine whether or not it is time to execute the winning promotion notification based on the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation.

If it is the execution timing of the prize promotion notification (33AKS022; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (33AKS023). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (33AKS023; Yes), the setting for executing the second mode winning promotion notification with the highest degree of winning promotion is performed (33AKS024). After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is terminated.

If the second reserved memory count is not 0 (33AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the second reserved memory count is 3 or more (33AKS025). If the second reserved memory number is not 3 or more (33AKS025; No), that is, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or 2, the winning promotion notification of the third mode, which is weaker than the second mode, is given. Settings for execution are made (33AKS026). After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is ended.

In this way, when the second reservation memory number is 0 in the time saving final variation, the winning promotion notification with a higher degree of winning promotion than when the second reservation memory number is 1 or 2 is executed. there is By doing so, it is possible to execute the winning promotion notification according to the second reserved memory number. In particular, when the second reserved memory number is 0, the strongest prize-winning notification is executed, so that the player's sense of danger can be aroused.

In addition, in the situation where the second reserved memory number in the time saving final fluctuation is 1 or 2 and the winning promotion notification is executed, if the display result of the fluctuation display based on the second reserved memory is a small hit, the winning promotion It is also possible not to execute notification. In this case, an effect may be executed to announce/suggest that the display result of the variable display based on the second reserved memory will be a small win.

If the second reserved memory number is 3 or more (33AKS025; Yes), a setting for executing a specific advance notice effect that suggests whether or not to be controlled to a jackpot game state (advantageous state) instead of the prize promotion notification is set. (33AKS027). After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is ended.

Thus, in the characteristic part 33AK, when the second reserved memory number is less than 3 in the time saving final fluctuation, by executing the winning promotion notification, the player is encouraged to accumulate the second reserved memory number. can be done. On the other hand, when the number of second reserved memories is 3 or more in the time saving final fluctuation, by executing the specific advance notice performance without executing the winning promotion notice, it is possible to prevent the notice from becoming troublesome, and the fluctuation display is slowed down. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance by the specific advance notice performance while preventing it from being done.

It should be noted that the specific advance notice effect may be executed at a predetermined rate instead of always executing the specific advance notice effect when the second reserved memory number is 3 or more. In this case, when the specific advance notice effect is not executed, the winning promotion notification may be executed, or the effect may not be executed. In addition, a plurality of types of effect modes of the specific advance notice effect may be provided, and the execution ratio of the specific advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode may be varied according to the display result or the like or the number of second reserved memories. By doing so, the specific foretelling effect can be diversified, and the effect of the specific foretelling effect can be enhanced.

If it is not the execution timing of the prize promotion notification (33AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the prize promotion neglect is being executed (33AKS028). In 33AKS028, for example, if the process of 33AKS024 or 33AKS026 has been executed, it is determined that the winning promotion notification is being executed. If the winning promotion notification is not being executed (33AKS028; No), the time saving final variation effect processing is terminated.

If the prize promotion notification is being executed (33AKS028; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to develop into super reach in the variation display based on the time saving final variation pattern (33AKS029). If it is time to develop into a super reach (33AKS029; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result of this variation is a big hit (big hit variation) (33AKS037). When it is determined that the current variation is a big hit variation (33AKS037; Yes), the winning promotion notification is stopped, and settings are made to execute the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (33AKS038). After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is ended. When it is a big hit variation, it is controlled to a big hit game state after that, and is controlled to a time saving state again. Even if the time-saving state is controlled again, if the second reserved storage number is not sufficiently accumulated, the winning promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the big hit fluctuation occurs, the winning promotion notification is stopped, and the ready-to-win effect that encourages the big win is preferentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the situation.

Note that the winning promotion notification may be continued even in the event of a big hit change. Also, in the case of selecting the variation pattern of the final time-saving variation from multiple types, if the reliability of the variation pattern of the final time-saving variation (reach production) is above a specific value, the winning promotion notification You may make it stop and perform a ready-to-win production.

If the current variation is not a big hit variation (33AKS037; No), in order to give priority to the execution of the winning promotion notification, the reach effect of super reach is performed by wiping (a small window area provided in the effect display device 9) (33AKS030 ).

If it is not the timing to develop into super reach (33AKS029; No), or after executing the processing of 33AKS030, it is determined whether or not the second reserved memory count has reached 3 or more (33AKS031). When the second reserved memory number becomes 3 or more (33AKS031; Yes), the award promotion notification being executed is terminated (33AKS032). At this time, when the ready-to-reach effect of the super reach is being executed by wiping, it is switched to the ready-to-reach effect of the full screen. After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is ended.

When the second reserved memory number remains less than 3 (33AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the advance notice effect (33AKS033). At AKS033, it is decided at 33AKS013 in FIG. 35-4 that the announcement effect is to be executed, and it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the announcement effect. If it is not the execution timing of the notice effect (33AKS033; No), the time saving final variation effect process is terminated.

When it is time to execute the announcement effect during the execution of the winning promotion notification (33AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is a low-expectation announcement effect (33AKS034). As for the low-expectation degree of advance notice performance, any one of a plurality of types of notice performances having a lower jackpot reliability than at least the notice performance having the highest jackpot reliability may be determined. For example, here, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is the notice effect with the lowest jackpot reliability.

If it is a notice effect with a low degree of expectation (33AKS034; Yes), even if the notice effect is executed, it interferes with the notification of the promotion of winning, and the expectation of the player cannot be improved much, so the execution of the notice effect is not performed. Abort (33AKS035). After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is ended.

If it is not a low-expectation advance notice effect (33AKS034; No), the setting is made to execute the notice effect only by voice (33AKS036). That is, even if the effect display device 9 displays the preview image and outputs the sound, the preview image is not displayed, and only the sound is output. As a result, it is possible to foreshadow/suggest that a big win will occur by means of the sound while preventing the notification of promotion of prize winning from being hindered by the forewarning image. After that, the time saving final variation effect processing is ended.

In this embodiment, when the advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the prize promotion notification, the notice effect is executed only with sound, but the other part of the notice effect (lighting of the lamp , movement of the movable body, etc.) may be executed.

In addition, for example, when determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in 33AKS013, by determining whether it is the second pending memory number or the time saving final change, it is possible to determine whether it is a situation to execute the winning promotion notification If the situation is to execute the winning promotion notification, control is performed so that execution of the low-expectation notice effect is not decided, and even when the notice effect is executed, the notice effect by voice can be executed. It may be determined.

Further, even during the execution of the winning promotion notification, the advance notice effect may be executed in parallel. In this case, only the advance notice effect with a degree of expectation higher than a predetermined level may be executed in parallel with the prize promotion notification.

FIG. 35-7 is a timing chart showing the contents of the effects and the like in the time saving final variation. As shown in FIG. 35-7 (A), when the second reserved memory number is 0 to 2 in the time saving final variation, the winning promotion notification starts at the predetermined winning promotion notification timing after the start of the variation. be done. When the second reserved storage number becomes 3 or more after execution of the prize promotion notification, the prize promotion notification is terminated at that time. If the winning promotion notification is not executed at the time when the game develops into super ready-to-win, the normal ready-to-win effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 35-7 (B), when the second pending memory number does not become 3 or more after the winning promotion notification is executed, even after developing into super reach, the reach effect executed by wiping Winning promotion notification is executed in parallel.

As shown in FIG. 35-7(C), when the number of second reserved memories is 3 or more in the time saving final fluctuation, at the same timing as the winning promotion notification timing, the specific advance notice effect is executed. For example, the specific advance notice effect is executed until it develops into super reach. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the period from the start of the fluctuation to the development of the super reach from being prolonged.

Next, an example of an effect operation related to the characteristic portion 33AK will be described. FIG. 35-8 shows an effect operation example when the winning promotion notification of the first mode is executed. FIG. 35-8(A) shows the effect display device 9 after the end of the jackpot game state, and by displaying the characters "chance time rush", it is notified that it will shift to the chance time (time saving state). It is In the characteristic portion 33AK, the effect display device 9 is provided with a first reserved display area 33AK001 indicating the number of first reserved memories. ing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35-8(B), the effect display device 9 executes the winning promotion notification of the first mode in which the winning promotion image 33AK011 saying "Aim right!" is displayed. In addition, since the game situation in the time saving state (the degree of accumulation of the second reserved memory number) is unknown, the winning promotion notification of the first mode is higher than the other modes (second mode, third mode). getting weaker. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who understands the game method from being notified of winning promotion more than necessary.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35-8(C), the variable display based on the first reserved memory is started. In addition, in the characteristic portion 33AK, during the time saving state, a right hitting image 33AK012 instructing (promoting) hitting right (aiming for winning in the second starting prize opening 14) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. .

In addition, for example, before and after the winning promotion notification of the first aspect, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, it is possible to secure the execution opportunity of the variable display of the second special symbol, and consecutive chances occur. An explanation effect may be executed to explain to the player that it will be extremely disadvantageous unless the second reserved memory number is accumulated in the time saving state. By doing so, it is possible to make the player understand the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 33AK, and to play the game fairly.

FIG. 35-9 shows an example of an effect operation in the time saving final variation. FIG. 35-9(A) shows the effect display device 9 on which the variable display is executed and the right-handed shot image 33AK012 is displayed. In the characteristic portion 33AK, the effect display device 9 is provided with a second reserved display area 33AK002 indicating the second reserved memory number. ing. In the time saving final variation, if the second pending memory number is 2, when the execution timing of the winning promotion notification comes, as shown in FIG. The winning promotion image 33AK013 is displayed, and the winning promotion notification of the third mode is executed in which the speaker 27 outputs a voice saying, "Hold the hold". At this time, by blinking the second reservation display area 33AK002, an effect that emphasizes that the second reservation memory number is not accumulated is also executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 35-9(B), during execution of the prize promotion notification, the variable display is executed in a small area such as the upper left of the effect display device 9. FIG.

After that, when the second reserved memory number does not increase, as shown in FIGS. 35-9 (C) and (D), the winning promotion notification is continuously executed even when reach is established and develops into super reach. be done. As shown in FIG. 35-9(D), the reach effect of super reach is executed in the wipe (small window area) 9S.

Also, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (A '), in the time saving final variation, if the number of second pending storage is 3, when it comes to the execution timing of the winning promotion notification, in FIG. 35-9 (B ') As shown, the specific advance notice effect is executed on the effect display device 9 . In FIG. 35-9(B'), only characters are used to omit the detailed content of the specific advance notice effect, but by displaying the effect image or outputting the sound, the predetermined specific notice effect is executed. All you have to do is The specific notice effect may be a effect that foretells/suggests that the game will be a big hit, or an effect that arouses the possibility of a super reach. In this way, when the number of second reserved memories is sufficiently accumulated and it is not extremely disadvantageous to the player, by executing the specific advance notice effect without executing the winning promotion notification, a suitable game according to the situation can be obtained. can perform the performance.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 33AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

The effect mode of the winning promotion notification shown in FIG. When the number of reserved memories is 1 or 2)> the first mode (at the time of starting the time saving state), the production mode may be arbitrary. An image of the target game area or the target winning opening (the second start winning opening 14) may be displayed as the prize promotion notification by display on the effect display device 9. FIG. In addition, the time until the end of the time-saving final variation may be counted down and displayed as prize-winning notification to arouse the player's sense of danger.

In the above embodiment, if the second retention memory number is 3 or more in the time saving final variation, a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state (advantageous state) without executing the winning promotion notification As a result, a specific notice effect was to be executed, but the suggestive effect was the effect of Ninji that suggested whether or not to control to an advantageous state (notice effect, reach effect, tenpai fanning of the effect pattern, etc.) good.

In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at the start of the time saving state, but the winning promotion notification at the start of the time saving state may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent execution of unnecessary prize-winning promotion notification to a player who understands the game method.

In the present embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect is executed during execution of the winning promotion notification, the winning promotion notification is preferentially executed by executing the ready-to-win effect by wiping. The method of preferentially executing the winning promotion notification is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the winning promotion notification is executed with priority over the ready-to-win effect. In the effect display device 9, the area used for the winning promotion notification may be made larger than the ready-to-win effect, or the winning promotion notification may be prioritized with respect to the output of sound and the light emission of the lamp. It should be noted that even if the prize promotion notification is being executed, the usual ready-to-win effect of super-reach may be executed. For example, if the display result is a small win, the normal super reach may be performed even if the prize promotion notification is being performed. In this case, a small win (a big win via a small win) occurs even when the second reserved memory number is small, so the player does not suffer any disadvantage. By doing so, it is possible to execute the winning promotion notification according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode of the winning promotion notification is different between when the second reserved memory number is 0 and when it is 1 to 2 in the time saving final fluctuation, but when the second reserved memory number is 2 or less In some cases, the winning promotion notification may be executed in a similar effect mode. In addition, when the second reserved memory number is 3 or more in the time saving final fluctuation, the specific notice effect is executed without executing the winning promotion notification, but when the second reserved memory number is 1 or more If the number is an arbitrary number, the specific advance notice effect may be executed without executing the winning promotion notification. In the time-saving final variation, the winning promotion notification may not be executed only when the second reserved storage number is the upper limit number at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation (for example, the execution timing of the winning promotion notification). That is, the threshold value for making the effect different according to the number of second reserved memories in the time saving final variation may be arbitrary.

Characteristic portion 33AK may be applied to a pachinko game machine having a drum-type variable display device. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 9 is provided that can variably display (also referred to as variable display) the effect pattern as the identification information. A variable display device having a plurality of cylinders (hereinafter also referred to as "reels") and having a plurality of display areas in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotating the plurality of reels is provided. good too. Then, instead of the variable display of the performance symbols, the variable display of the symbols may be executed by rotating the spinning drum in the variable display device, and whether or not a big hit will be achieved may be displayed according to the display result.

In this case, the pachinko game machine 1 may be provided with both the performance display device 9 and the variable display device. For example, a variable display device may be provided in the central portion of the game area, and the effect display device 9 may be provided in the peripheral portion (for example, upper portion) of the variable display device. Then, the effect display device 9 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbols, and displays various kinds of effects and games. For example, the prize promotion notification may be executed by the effect display device 9, and the specific advance notice effect (suggestive effect) may be executed by the variable display device. When the second reserved memory number is less than 3 in the time saving final variation, etc., when the second reserved memory number is not sufficiently accumulated, the specific notice performance is not executed on the variable display device, and the effect display device 9 You may make it perform a prize promotion alert|report in . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the winning promotion notification by paying attention to the specific advance notice effect on the variable display device.

In addition, regarding this embodiment, a game machine (so-called type 1 game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the variable display results of special symbols and performance symbols, and a variable winning ball device (so-called A game machine combined with a game machine that shifts to a jackpot game state (so-called second type game machine) based on a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific winning hole (V winning hole) (So-called one-type two-type mixing machine) has been described, but the characteristic portion 33AK may be applied to the second type game machine.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 33AK)
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic part 33AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A first variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display 8a) that performs variable display;
A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display 8b) that performs variable display;
a pending storage means (for example, a second pending storage buffer) for storing, as pending information, information relating to variable display in the second variable display means;
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, the processing of S164 to S170) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) that makes it easier to store the hold information than the normal state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times CPU 56) to execute,
Effect control means ( For example, the production control CPU 101) that executes the time saving final fluctuation production process,
In the special state, when the reservation information is stored up to the upper limit number, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the upper limit number is not stored (for example, in the variable display of the second special symbol, A small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7),
The production control means is
When the number of the pending information stored in the pending storage means is a first number (for example, 0 to 2) less than the upper limit number and the special state final variable display, which is the variable display of the predetermined number of times, is executed, It is possible to execute the prompt notification,
The promotion notification is not executed when the special state final variable display is executed with a second number (for example, 3 or more) in which the number of the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means is larger than the first number. Then, the suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the situation.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the effect control means is controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute the promotion notification (for example, the winning promotion notification of the first mode) in a manner different from the promotion notification in the special state final variable display. can be
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the promotional notification, and draw attention to the promotional notification in the special state final variable display.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The production control means can execute the ready-to-win production after the specific timing of the special state final variable display, and if the number of the pending information is the first number even after the specific timing, the ready-to-win production (For example, the ready-to-win effect is executed by wiping 9S).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
including 0 as the first number;
Said production control means, according to whether the number of said pending information is 0 or other said first number, to change the aspect of said promotion notification (for example, to execute the processing of 33AKS023 to 33AKS026). may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the promotion notification.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The effect control means executes at least a part of the suggestive effect (for example, the process of 33AKS036 is executed) when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect with a specific degree of expectation during the execution of the promotion notification. do).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the suggestive effect with the specific degree of expectation is being executed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect control means executes the suggestive effect in a first effect device (for example, a drum type variable display device), and executes the promotion notification in a second effect device (for example, effect display device 9) different from the first effect device. may be executed in
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the second effect device in which the promotion notification is being performed.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 73AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 73AK will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 73AK, when the time saving state is terminated, if the number of second pending memories, which is the number of second pending information (second pending storage, second pending storage information) is accumulated , The special symbol game (variable display) of the second special symbol is executed for the second reserved memory number accumulated even after the end of the time saving state. If it is controlled to the small winning game state based on the special game, V winning occurs and the game is controlled to the big winning game state again, and is controlled to the time saving state again. That is, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, the probability that a so-called consecutive chance will occur increases, and if the second reserved memory number is not accumulated in the time saving state, the amount that was not accumulated (for example, the maximum 4 times), the opportunity to run the special game of the second special symbol (opportunity for a small winning lottery to be won at about 1/7 as described later) is lost, so the game is much more playable than when the second reserved memory number is accumulated. be disadvantageous to the person. Therefore, the value of one of the second reserved storage numbers is high.

During the last variation in the time saving state (for example, just before the end of the variation), the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 15 and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, and when the display result of the normal pattern is a hit, the time saving. There is a possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state during the fluctuation of the second special symbol after the state is terminated. Then, there is a possibility that a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 14) in the open state and the second reserved memory number increases. In this case, after the end of the time saving state, the special symbol game of the second special symbol is executed more than four times, which is the upper limit number of the second reserved memory number. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 73AK, the value of one of the second reserved storage numbers is high. Therefore, after the end of the time saving state, if the second special pattern special game is executed exceeding the upper limit number of the second reserved memory, the probability of occurrence of a small hit (probability of consecutive chances) increases, so the number of players is more than expected. , and the fairness of the game cannot be ensured.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK, during the final fluctuation in the time saving state, when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit number, the time saving state (high base control) is terminated. there is By doing so, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from opening after the end of the time saving state and increasing the second reserved memory number, and after the end of the time saving state, the upper limit number of the second reserved memory number is exceeded. It is possible to prevent the special symbol game of the second special symbol from being executed. And the fairness of a game can be secured.

FIG. 36-1 is a diagram showing a winning type table in the characteristic portion 73AK. The main differences from the classification table shown in FIG. 2 are the number of rounds, the provision of a time-saving jackpot in the symbol jackpot, and the occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, as the jackpot types, the pattern 5R time saving jackpot (first jackpot), pattern 5R time saving jackpot (second jackpot), small hit (first jackpot) via 11 (10) R time saving jackpot, and There is a big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via a small hit (second small hit). The numbers in parentheses for the big win via the small win indicate the number of times the variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Further, as the types of small hits, a first small hit, a second small hit, and a third small hit are provided.

In this embodiment, the big hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 36-2(A). Therefore, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is 1/199 when the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When it is determined that a big win will be made, the big win type is determined to be the first big win or the second big win. As shown in FIG. 36-2(B), in the case of this embodiment, the "first big win" and the "second big win" are each selected at 50%. The jackpot pattern of the "first jackpot" is set to "7", and the jackpot pattern of the second jackpot is set to "3".

Similarly, small hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 36-2 (A). Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1/30 when the first special symbol changes, and 1/7.35 when the second special symbol changes. When it is determined that a small win is to be made with respect to the second special symbol, the small win type of the first small win or the second small win is determined. As shown in FIG. 36-2(C), in the case of this embodiment, when the second special symbol changes, the "first small win" and the "second small win" are each selected at 50%. The small winning symbol of the "first small winning" is set to "1", and the small winning symbol of the second big winning is set to "5". When it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the first special symbol, it is determined as a small hit type of the third small hit. As shown in FIG. 36-2(D), in the case of this embodiment, the "third small hit" is selected at 100% when the first special symbol changes. The small winning pattern of the "third small winning" is set to "9".

As shown in FIG. 36-1, the big hits via small hits in this embodiment include 11 (10) R time reduction via small hits with different numbers of rounds in the big hits, and 6 (5) R time reduction via small hits. Includes jackpot. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment includes a symbol 5R time-saving big hit and a symbol 5R time-saving jackpot which are generated directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

The symbol 5R time-saving jackpot (also referred to as the first jackpot) and the symbol 5R time-saving jackpot (also referred to as the second jackpot) are jackpots in which the big prize opening is opened five times (5R: 29 seconds for each round).

11 (10) R time-saving jackpot via small hit, after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning mouth opens 10 times (10R: each round 29 seconds) It is a big hit to be opened, and the prize winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of times the big prize opening is substantially opened is 10 times, and the player has a symbol 10R time saving for opening the big prize opening. It feels like a jackpot type similar to a jackpot. Via small hit 11 (10) The small hit that triggers the R time-saving big hit is also called the first small hit.

After the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning mouth opens 5 times (5R: each round 29 Second) It is a big hit to be released. Although the prize winning device is opened for 6 rounds, the number of openings of the big prize opening is actually 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the big prize opening is the same jackpot type as the pattern 5R short-time jackpot. The small hit that triggers the big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via the small hit is also called the second small hit. The first small hit and the second small hit are generated based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

For the third small hit generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds×10 times) in the same manner as the first and second small wins. , V prizes are not generated.

FIG. 36-3 is a timing chart showing how the V winning area is opened in the small prize. When the first small hit or the second small hit is achieved based on the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10 times), the V winning area 870 is also open until one game ball enters the V winning area 870. As a result, it is possible to win a V prize in the minor winning game state based on the first minor winning and the second minor winning. On the other hand, when the third small hit is achieved based on the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10 times), the V winning area 870 is closed, and the V winning area 870 is opened t hours after the opening of the V judgment winning device 87 is completed. Here, since t is longer than the time required for the game ball to reach the V winning area 870 from the V determination winning device 87 (operation opening), V Winning is not possible.

As described above, in this embodiment, there is a case where a small win is won based on the variable display of the first special symbol, but the small win type has little substantial merit for the player. . In this way, by providing a small win type that has little substantial merit for the player, it is possible to prevent the small win from being excessively advantageous to the player.

As a condition for ending the time saving state after the big hit with 5R time saving, the end condition that the number of times of fluctuation display of the 2nd special pattern is 1 time, and the total number of times of fluctuation display of the 1st special pattern and the 2nd special pattern is 5 Two conditions are set, namely, a termination condition of times. The number of times of the time-saving end condition that the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol is 1 is considered that the game ball entering the V judgment winning device 87 enters the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. is set as In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the termination condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol is 1 time, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is a certain number of times.

Symbol 5R time saving and time saving state after the big hit is the end condition that the number of fluctuation display times of the second special pattern is 1 time, and the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special design and the second special design is 5 times. is the same as the time-saving state after the symbol 4R time-saving jackpot described in FIG. The reason for this is that, just after the start of the time saving state, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established, a maximum of four first start winnings can be stored before the jackpot game state. To make it possible to reliably execute one-time variable display of a second special symbol that is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to a player even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the holding information is started. . By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that in the time saving state, it is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol from being stopped.

In addition, after the big hit via the small win, the end condition is that the number of times the variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times, and the end condition is that the total number of times the variation display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times. Two end states are set for . Such a number of 7 times of the end condition of the time-saving state is set in consideration of the fact that game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 enter the V winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 5R short time big hit, there is a possibility of generating a big hit via a small hit. is the number of times that is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the occurrence of the big win via the small win, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the big win via the small win can be enhanced.

In addition, the end condition that the total number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the fluctuation display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the reserved memory based on the first start prize which can be stored up to four before the game state, 7 of the second special symbol which is likely to be determined as a big win advantageous to the player. This is to ensure that the variable display of the variable number of times can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol by the reserved memory based on the first start prize is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, so that it is easy to determine a big win advantageous to the player in the time saving state. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the time saving state, the end condition is also set that the number of occurrences of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol is two. As small hits based on the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above, the first small hit that is in the big hit game state of substantially 10 rounds at the time of V winning, and the second small hit that is in the big hit game state of substantially 5 rounds at the time of V winning. There is a hit and a hit. The type of the small hit can be confirmed by the pattern of the small win, but if the second small win occurs in the time saving state, V is intentionally aimed at becoming the first small win, which is a more advantageous big win gaming state. A game method such as avoiding winning can be selected. In order to make it difficult to select such a game method, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the time-saving state, the end condition is also set that the number of occurrences of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol is two. . In addition, since the small hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol does not become a big hit via the small hit, it is not counted as the number of occurrences of the small hit in the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending due to the occurrence of a small win that is not advantageous to the player. In addition, the number of occurrences of small hits, which is the condition for ending the time saving state, is not limited to two times, and may be one time, three times or more (less than the number of fluctuations, which is the condition for ending the time saving state). In addition, when a big win is not achieved via a small win such as the third small win and no small win with little merit for the player is provided, the number of occurrences of all small wins is counted, and the time is shortened according to the number of occurrences. End the state.

In addition, after the pattern 5R time-saving no big hit, it shifts to a normal state. In the following description, the three big hits of the pattern 5R time-saving big hit, 11 (10) R time-saving big hit via the small hit, and 6 (5) R time-saving big hit via the small hit may be expressed as time-saving big hit.

In addition, the hit type shown in FIG. 36-1 is an example, and in the characteristic portion 73AK, the first special symbol is set to be determined as a small hit. It may be set so as not to be determined to be a small hit. Further, the second special symbol is set so as to be determined as a big hit, but the second special symbol may be set so as not to be determined as a big hit. In addition, the number of rounds of big hits, the number of types of hits, conditions for ending the time-saving state, etc. can be changed without departing from the gist of the present invention.

Next, the operation of the characteristic portion 73AK will be described. FIG. 36-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process at the start of fluctuation which is executed once at the start of fluctuation. The process at the start of fluctuation may be executed, for example, during the special symbol fluctuation process (S303). The process at the time of fluctuation start includes the process of subtracting and updating the time saving number counter at the time of fluctuation start and managing the time saving flag.

In the fluctuation start processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 73AKS001). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS001; No), the fluctuation start time processing is terminated.

If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS001; Yes), the total time saving number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS002).

The total time-saving number counter is counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. A total time-saving number counter is set to 5 times when controlled to the time-saving state after the 5R symbol time-saving jackpot in the jackpot end processing, and is set to 11 times when controlled to the time-saving state after the time-saving jackpot via the small win. , step 73AKS002, each time the variable display is executed, the value is updated by subtraction.

Next, based on whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is determined whether or not it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 73S003). When it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 73AKS003; Yes), the special figure 2 time reduction number counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS004).

The special figure 2 time saving number counter is a counting means for counting the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol when controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game. The special figure 2 time-saving number counter is set to 1 time in the jackpot end processing when it is controlled to the time-saving state after the 5R pattern time-saving jackpot, and is set to 7 times when it is controlled to the time-saving state after the time-saving jackpot via the small hit. It is set, and is subtracted and updated by step 73AKS004 every time the second special symbol is displayed once.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter has become "0" (step 73AKS005). When the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter is not "0" (step 73AKS005; No), when it is the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (step 73AKS003; No), the total time saving number It is determined whether or not the count value of the counter has reached "0" (step 73AKS006). When the count value of the total time saving number counter is not "0" (step 73AKS006; No), the process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

If the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter becomes "0" (step 73AKS005; Yes), If the count value of the total time saving number counter becomes "0" (step 73AKS006; Yes), the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS007), and a time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS008). After that, the fluctuation start time processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time saving number counter is subtracted and updated at the start of fluctuation, and the time saving flag is reset at the start of fluctuation in the final change in the time saving state (final time saving change). However, when the time saving flag is reset, the time saving state (high base control) does not end immediately, and the time saving extension flag is set until the second reservation storage number reaches the upper limit. And while the time saving extension flag is set, the time saving state (high base control) continues. Thus, in this embodiment, since the time saving flag is reset at a fixed timing (at the time of time saving final variation), the control of resetting the time saving flag becomes easy, and stable behavior can be expected. In addition, during the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving state is determined and managed by the time saving extension flag.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving extension flag are referred to in the normal symbol process processing, and when one of them is on, the high base control in the normal symbol process processing (control etc. to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol ) is executed. When the time saving flag and the time saving extension flag are turned off, the high base control in the normal symbol process ends, and the time saving state ends.

FIG. 36-5 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving end determination processing. The time saving end determination process is a process for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied during fluctuation, and is a process for ending the time saving state when the end condition is satisfied, and is repeated in the special symbol changing process (S303). executed.

In the time saving end determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS011). If the time saving extension flag is not set (step 73AKS011; No), the fluctuation start processing is terminated.

If the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS011; Yes), whether or not the second reservation memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reservation memory for counting the second reservation memory number whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) (step 73AKS012). If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit (step 73AKS012; No), the time saving end determination process is terminated.

In the time saving final fluctuation in which the time saving extension flag is set, when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit (step 73AKS012; Yes), the conditions for ending the time saving state are established, and the time saving extension flag is reset (step 73AKS013). Then, a process for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS014), and the time saving end determination process is terminated.

In the above embodiment, the special symbol stop processing (FIG. 13) includes a process of subtracting and updating the time saving number counter and resetting the time saving flag. In the characteristic part 73AK, by the processing shown in FIGS. 36-4 and 36-5, the time saving number counter is subtracted and updated, and the processing for managing the time saving flag and the time saving extension flag is executed. processing is not performed. In addition, in the characteristic portion 73AK, since the number of small hits in the time saving state is also the end condition of the time saving state, processing for ending the time saving state based on the number of small hits in the special symbol stop processing is also executed. .

FIG. 36-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing related to the characteristic portion 73AK. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 36-6, the same step numbers are attached to the same processing as the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 13, and the description is omitted. In the special symbol stop processing related to the characteristic portion 73AK, when the jackpot flag is set (step S133; Yes), the CPU 56 resets the flag when the time saving flag or the time saving extension flag is set (step AKS030 ).

When the jackpot flag is not set (step S133; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS027). If the time saving extension flag is not set (step 73AKS027; No), the process proceeds to step S139. If the time-saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS027; Yes), it is the end of the time-saving final variation and the display result is a loss or a small hit, so the time-saving extension flag is reset (step 73AKS028), and the normal state designation command is issued. A process for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS029), and the process proceeds to step S139.

When the small hit flag is set in step S139 (step S139; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS021).

If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit type is the third small hit (step 73AKS022). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS021; No), or if the small hit type is the third small hit (step 73AKS022; Yes), the process proceeds to step S140.

If the minor hit type is not the third minor hit (step 73AKS022; No), that is, if the minor hit type is the first minor hit or the second minor hit generated based on the variation of the second special symbol, the number of minor hits The counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS023). The small hit number counter is a counter for counting the number of first small hits or second small hits in the time saving state, and when it is controlled in the time saving state, the initial value is "2" (second special symbol A value corresponding to the termination condition that the number of occurrences of small hits based on the variable display is two times is set.

After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit number counter has become "0" (step 73AKS024), and when the small hit number counter has become "0" (step 73AKS024; Yes), the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS025 ), a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS026), and the process proceeds to step S140. If the small hit number counter is not "0" (step 73AKS024; No), the process proceeds to step S140.

Moreover, when the small hit flag is not set (step S139; No), it transfers to step S152.

In the characteristic part 73AK, by executing such a special symbol stop process, when the control to terminate the time saving state based on the number of small hits and the second reservation memory number at the end of the time saving final fluctuation is not the upper limit However, you can execute control to end the time saving state.

In particular, in the time-saving final fluctuation, even if the condition for ending the time-saving state is not satisfied because the number of second pending memories does not reach the upper limit, the time-saving extension flag is turned off at the end of the time-saving final fluctuation, so the time-saving state can be ensured. It can be terminated, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

FIG. 36-7 shows an example of an effect operation in the time-saving final variation of the characteristic portion 73AK. FIG. 36-7(A) shows the effect display device 9 on which the variable display is executed and the right-handed shot image 73AK012 is displayed. The effect display device 9 is provided with a second reserved display area 73AK002 indicating the second reserved memory number, and FIG. 36-7(A) shows that the second reserved memory number is two. In the time saving final fluctuation, if the second pending memory number is 2 (if it is not the upper limit number), for example, when it comes to the execution timing of the winning promotion notification, as shown in FIG. A prize-winning promotion image 73AK013 saying "Put up the reserve!" Then, when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit number of 4, for example, as shown in FIG. A character image 73AK014 is displayed. At this time, the time saving state (high base control) is also ended. After that, for example after the reach is executed, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D), the time saving final variation ends. In addition, the time saving final variation may be selected or easily selected for a variation pattern with a long variation time (for example, a variation pattern with reach) in order to facilitate accumulation of the second special symbol reservation information. In addition, the time saving final fluctuation may be made difficult to open the variable winning ball device 15 during the fluctuation after the time saving state by lengthening the stop time of the pattern or the interval until the time fluctuation.

After that, after the time saving state ends, the variable display of the second special symbols for the number of the accumulated second reserved memories is executed. Here, after the end of the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed four times corresponding to the upper limit number of the second reserved memory number. Then, when all are lost, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (E), the number of consecutive wins after the shift to the time saving state, the total number of winning balls, etc. are displayed, and the state advantageous to the player has ended. is shown. Even after the end of the time-saving state, the right-hand hitting image 73AK015 with only an arrow is continuously displayed because the right-hand hitting is performed in the case of a small hit occurring at about 1/7. As a result, it is possible to show the player an appropriate game method.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36-7(F), an arrow image 73AK016 is displayed to notify that the game will be played with a left hand.

In addition, the display of the prize promotion notification shown in FIG. At the time when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit number, the control for ending the time saving state may be executed, and the effect mode during the variable display may be arbitrary.

FIG. 36-8 is a timing chart until the end of the time saving state. Timings t1 to t4 in FIG. 36-8 correspond to timings t1 to t4 in FIG. 36-7. As shown in FIG. 36-8, at timing t1, which is the start timing of the final variation of working hours, the working hours saving flag is reset to off and the working hours extension flag is set to on. After that, at timing t2, when the number of second pending memories reaches the upper limit number, the time saving extension flag is reset to off, and the time saving state (high base control) ends. Then, after the time saving final variation ends at timing t3, the variation display of the second special symbol for the second reserved memory number is executed.

While the variable display of the second special symbol for the second reserved memory number accumulated after the time saving state and after the time saving end is executed, the main board (game control board) 31 by the information output process of step S29 Hall management A time saving signal is output to the outside of the game machine such as a computer for use. Also, at this time, a right-handed LED (right-handed lamp) provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 or the like to indicate that the player is in a right-handed state is turned on. When the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second reserved memory number ends at timing t4, the time saving medium signal and the right-handed LED are turned off. By doing so, it is possible to preferably grasp the number of consecutive wins and the number of balls released by the external device. Also, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate game method. The timing of outputting the time-saving signal to the outside is the right-handed command output from the main board 31 to the production control board 80 (a command indicating that it is in a time-saving state, or during the pending digestion of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving state. It may be synchronized with the output timing of the command indicating that the

(Modified example of characteristic portion 73AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the time saving flag is reset at the start of the time saving final change, and the time saving extension flag is set, and whether or not the time saving state is in the time saving final change is managed by the time saving extension flag. Without being limited to this, you may make it manage whether it is a time saving state only by a time saving flag, without providing a time saving extension flag. In this case, when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied in the time saving final variation, the time saving flag is reset to end the time saving state.

FIG. 36-9 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving end determination processing in a modified example in which the time saving extension flag is not provided. In the time saving end determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS101). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS101; No), the fluctuation start time processing is terminated.

If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether it is the final change in the time saving state (73AKS102 to 73AKS104).

First, it is determined whether or not the variable display of this time is the variable display of the second special symbol (73AKS102), and if it is the variable display of the second special symbol (73AKS102; Yes), the special figure 2 time reduction number counter is "1" (73AKS103). In addition, when it is not the variable display of the second special symbol (73AKS103; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the total time reduction number counter is "1" (73AKS104).

If the count value of the special figure 2 time saving number counter is "1" (73AKS103; Yes), or if the count value of the total time saving number counter is "1" (73AKS104; Yes), this time fluctuation display is time saving Since this is the final change in the state, whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 4 or not) is determined (step 73AKS105). If the second pending memory number has not reached the upper limit (step 73AKS105; No), the time saving end determination process is terminated.

In the time saving final fluctuation, if the number of second pending storage reaches the upper limit (step 73AKS105; Yes), the condition for ending the time saving state is established, the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS106), and the production control of the normal state designation command A process for transmitting to the microcomputer 100 for use is executed (step 73AKS107), and the time saving end determination process is terminated.

In addition, in this modification, the fluctuation start time processing shown in FIG. 36-4 is not executed in step S303, and in step S304, the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. A special symbol stop process is executed in which a process of ending the time saving state according to the number of small hits based on the variation display of the symbol) is added.

According to this modification, there is no need to provide a new flag such as a time saving extension flag, and in the time saving final variation, the time saving state can be ended when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit number.

In the above embodiment, in the final time-saving change, the time-saving state (high base control) was terminated when the number of second reserved memories reached the upper limit number, but in the final time-saving change, the number of second reserved memories You may make it terminate a time saving state based on having become a predetermined number (for example, 3 grade|etc.,) of less than an upper limit number. In addition, the time saving state may be terminated after a predetermined grace period elapses instead of immediately ending the time saving state when the second reserved storage number becomes a predetermined number less than the upper limit number in the time saving final fluctuation. In addition, the time saving state may be terminated based on the fact that the second reserved memory number increased in the time saving final variation has become a specific number (for example, 2, etc.).

Further, in the time saving final fluctuation, even if the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit number, the time saving state may be ended at a timing before the end of the fluctuation for a predetermined period.

In the time saving final variation, the control to end the time saving state based on the number of second pending memories becoming the upper limit number (predetermined number) is not limited to the control of the above embodiments and modifications, arbitrary control may be realized by

In addition, in the time saving final variation, the conditions for ending the time saving state may be changed according to whether or not there is an advantageous display result (small win or big win) by reading the second reserved storage information in advance. . For example, in the time saving final change, if there is no advantageous display result in the second reserved storage information, the time saving state is terminated based on the second reserved storage number reaching the upper limit number, and the second reserved storage information If there is a display result that is advantageous to , the time saving state may be ended based on the second reserved storage number becoming a predetermined number less than the upper limit number. By doing so, it is possible to execute high-base control according to the game situation.

A pachinko machine in which a non-electric accessory is opened based on the winning of a game ball in a variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) and a game ball can enter a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening. The invention relating to the characteristic portion 73AK may be applied to the game machine. When the non-electric accessory is released, it will be in an open state until a specified number (for example, two) of game balls wins. In such a game machine, if the time saving state (high-base control) is ended at the end timing of the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving final fluctuation will increase the number of second reserved memories to the upper limit while non-electric accessories (second start winning opening ) ends the time-saving state in the open state, and after the time-saving state ends, the second special symbol is displayed for the second reserved memory number that has accumulated. 2 starting winning port) can win a specified number of game balls. Therefore, even in a pachinko game machine equipped with such a non-electric accessory, by ending the time saving state (high base control) at the timing when the second retention memory number reaches the upper limit due to the time saving final fluctuation, the variable winning ball device It is possible to reduce the number of game balls that win a prize (ordinary electric accessory), and it is difficult to end the time saving state with the non-electric accessory (second start winning opening) open while the number of second reserved memories is set as the upper limit. can be

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 73AK)
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 73AK is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1 according to 73AK) that can perform variable display in the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 8a) and the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 8b) ) and
It is easier for the player to be more advantageous when the variable display is performed by the second variable display means than when the variable display is performed by the first variable display means (for example, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning device (e.g., a Variable winning ball device 15),
a pending storage means (e.g., a second pending storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to the variable display of the second variable display means as second pending information based on entry of a game medium into the variable winning device;
A special state control means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state, a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be in the open state than in a normal state;
a special state ending means (for example, a CPU 56 that executes the processing of steps 73AKS013, 73AKS028, and 73AKS106) that ends the special state based on the number of times variable display is performed in the special state;
Said special state ending means, in the final variable display in said special state, on the condition that the number of said second pending information stored in said pending storage means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is the upper limit number) , the special state can be terminated (for example, the CPU 56 executing the processing of steps 73AKS012, step 73AKS013, step 73AKS105, and step 73AKS106).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second variable display means from executing the variable display more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and to secure the fairness of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special state ending means, when the number of the second pending information stored in the pending storage means does not reach the predetermined number in the last variable display in the special state, The state may be ended (for example, the CPU 56 executing the processing of step 73AKS028 and step S149).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the special state is controlled, the first flag (for example, the time saving flag) is turned on, and in the final variable display in the special state, the first flag is turned off at the start of the variable display and the second flag (For example, a time saving extension flag) is turned on, and a flag management means (for example, step 73AKS012, step 73AKS013 CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS013) is provided, and the second flag is turned off when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The special state ending means may end the special state when the second flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second variable display means from executing the variable display more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and to secure the fairness of the game.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (2) above,
Flag management that turns on a first flag (for example, a time saving flag) when controlled to the special state, and turns off the first flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the final variable display in the special state. means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of steps 73AKS105 and 73AKS106),
The special state ending means may end the special state when the first flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second variable display means from executing the variable display more times than the upper limit number of the second reserved information after the end of the special state, and to secure the fairness of the game.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
When it is controlled to the small winning game state based on the variable display on the second variable display means than when it is controlled to the small winning game state based on the variable display on the first variable display means, It is likely to be advantageous for the player (for example, Figures 36-1 and 36-2),
The special state termination means is
The number of variable displays in the special state is counted, and when the number of variable displays in the special state reaches the first number, the special state can be terminated (for example, the processing of steps 73AKS007, step 73AKS028, and step S149). ) along with
The number of times of the small winning game state in the special state is counted, and when the number of times of the small winning game state in the special state becomes the second number, the special state can be ended (for example, the processing of step 73AKS025 ),
counting the number of times of variable display in the first variable display means and the second variable display means as the number of times of variable display in the special state (for example, executing the processing of step 73AKS002 and step S143);
As the number of times of the small winning game state in the special state, only the number of times of the small winning game state based on the variable display on the second variable display means is counted, and the small winning game state based on the variable display on the first variable display means is counted. The winning game state may not be counted (for example, the processing of steps 73AKS022 and 73AKS023 may be executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control to the special state.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An external signal sending means (for example, CPU56 for executing the processing of S29) for sending a signal (for example, a signal during time saving) indicating that it is in the special state to the outside,
The external signal sending means may send a signal indicating the special state for a predetermined period even after the special state ends (for example, FIG. 36-8).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably recognize the continuation of the advantageous state by the external device.

[Other Modifications]
Next, other modified examples, characteristic points, etc. are listed below.

(1) In the above-described embodiment, various selection decisions by lottery for executing the effect pattern suggesting the number of rounds may be executed at the start of the fluctuation display of the small win, and the small win game state and the You can run it when you can.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, an example of changing the effect mode of the V winning aura image 95 each time a game ball enters the game according to a predetermined effect pattern is shown as the round number suggesting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each time an entry of a game ball is detected, it is decided by lottery whether or not to change the presentation mode (for example, color) of the V winning aura image 95, and based on the result of the lottery, the V winning aura image is determined. You may make it change the production|presentation mode of 95. In that case, the determination of whether or not to change the color and the selection of the color to be changed may be executed each time the entry of the game ball is detected. Alternatively, the color to be changed may be selected and determined.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, when the V winning aura image 95 becomes rainbow-colored in the number-of-rounds suggestion effect, the 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the V winning aura image 95 may be rainbow-colored when there is a 16 (15) R time-saving jackpot and there is pending storage information that is a pending group. In addition, when there is a 5(4)R time-saving jackpot and there is pending storage information that is a pending group, an effect may be provided in which the V winning aura image 95 becomes rainbow-colored.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, an example of executing an effect in which the color of the V winning aura image 95 can change is shown in the round number suggesting effect as the predetermined effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the number-of-rounds suggesting effect, an effect in which the V winning image 94 changes from the letter "v" to the letter "W" may be executed. In that case, the color of the V winning aura image 95 may be changed in the same manner as described above.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the big-hit game state described as the advantageous state is exemplified by a big-hit game state in which the variable winning means is opened a plurality of times.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the effect of changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 accompanying the V winning image 94 is shown as an example of the round suggestion effect. A V winning aura image may be displayed as an unaccompanied image (for example, an aura-shaped effect image may be displayed at a position away from the V winning aura image 94), and an effect of changing its color may be performed. Whether or not to execute the effect of changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 accompanying the V winning prize image 94 is determined by a predetermined lottery, and may not be executed. .

(7) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the sum of the number of pending runs of symbol big wins and the number of pending runs of small wins, such as "+3 BONUS", is displayed as the pending run notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display may be made in which the number of reserved runs for the big win and the number of reserved runs for the small win can be individually specified.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, there is no effect data for the case where the number of game balls entering the V-judgment winning device 87 exceeds 10 as the effect pattern when executing the effect indicating the number of rounds. However, effect data may be provided for the case where the number of game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 exceeds 10 pieces. For example, effect data may be provided such that when the number of game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 exceeds 10, the color is the same as the tenth color. In this way, even when the number of game balls entering the V judgment winning device 87 exceeds 10, the round number suggesting effect can be executed without causing discomfort.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, the contents of the second holding memory information that exists when the big win game state occurs are pre-read, and the holding memory information that becomes the "big hit" and the holding memory information that becomes the "small hit" are read in advance. An example of executing the pending continuous notification effect is shown when there is either. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous holding notification effect may be executed only when there is holding storage information that becomes a "minor hit". It is also possible to execute the continuous holding notification performance only when there is holding storage information that will result in a 'big hit'.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, in the second holding storage information that exists when the big hit gaming state occurs, there is holding storage information that is a "big hit" and holding storage information that is a "small hit" An example of executing the same holding continuous notification effect in the same effect mode is shown for each of the case where there is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute the holding consecutive notification performances in different production modes depending on whether there is holding storage information for a "big hit" or for a "small hit".

(11) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the total number of "symbol jackpots" and "minor wins" in the second holding storage information that exists when the jackpot gaming state occurs, the same It is also possible to execute a continuous suspension notification effect of a performance mode, or to execute a continuous suspension notification effect of a different performance mode according to the total number.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the second reserved storage information that exists when the big win gaming state occurs includes only "big hit", only "small hit", and "big hit". and when there is both a small hit", the holding continuous notification performance of the same performance mode may be executed, and the holding continuous notification performance of different types of performance modes may be executed according to these cases.

(13) The pre-reading of the second hold storage information for executing the hold continuous notification effect may be executed at the start of the small hit or big hit variation display, or may be executed during the small hit game state, It may be executed during the jackpot game state.

(14) The V-ramp effect that is executed as the above-described holding consecutive notification effect may not be an effect capable of informing the number of holding runs, and may be an effect capable of informing the number of holding runs. In the case of rendering the number of pending stations to be notified, the relationship between the number of pending stations and the color of light emitted from the lamp is determined in advance in the V lamp presentation, and based on this relationship, the number of stations is determined by the color of light emitted from the lamp. Notification may be possible.

(15) Regarding "big win via small win", instead of selecting and determining the type of big win when it is determined as a small win, a plurality of control patterns such as the number of rounds of the big win are set when a V winning occurs. You may make it select from a kind of control pattern.

(16) The arrangement of structures such as the variable winning ball device 15, the V-judgment winning device 87, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 shown in the above-described embodiment is an example, and the following different arrangements can be made. may be adopted. For example, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be provided in the right gaming area. In addition, a V prize area is provided inside the big-hit variable winning ball device 20, and the big-hitting variable winning ball device 20 combines the variable winning ball device for big winning and the variable winning ball device for small winning into one variable winning ball. A device may be used for both.

(17) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball wins in the V winning area of the V judgment winning device 87, the big win game state is entered and only the big win variable winning ball device 20 is opened. However, in the jackpot game state, the V judgment winning device 87 may also be opened in a predetermined opening manner, or only the V judgment winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening manner. .

(18) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the V judgment winning device 87 is always opened. However, when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 15, it is determined whether or not to open the variable winning ball device 15 based on a specific lottery, and a lottery result to open the variable winning ball device 15. The V judgment winning device 87 may be opened when it becomes.

(19) In the above-described embodiment, when the game ball enters the V winning area in the V judgment winning device 87 in the small winning game state, an example is shown in which the game is controlled to the big winning game state. Such a game state operation may be executed by controlling the big win game state in which the same operation as the game state is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a jackpot game control of an opening pattern such as opening the V judgment winning device 87 in the first round and opening the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 in rounds after the second round. When it is determined to execute such a big win game control by a big win determination, such a big win game state is started, and the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as the control of the first round of the big win game state. A second round of opening the big winning variable winning ball device 20 by continuing the big winning game state when the game ball wins the V prize in the V winning area 870 in the first round. The subsequent round control is executed to show a jackpot game state. On the other hand, in the first round of the big hit game state, when the game ball does not win the V prize area 870 in the V judgment winning device 87, the big win game state is not continued from the second round onwards, and in the first round. Execute control to terminate.

(20) Advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include various advantageous states such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, and a high base state. In a game machine in which the jackpot determination probability can be controlled from a low probability state to a high probability state (probability variable state), the high probability state is also included in the advantageous state. In this embodiment, as a more specific advantageous state, it corresponds to the opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 in the jackpot game state.

(21) As a specific effect, the number of reach lines is increased (decreased display is also possible) according to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved storage information), and the following effects are performed. may be For example, a predetermined icon image (for example, a star-shaped image showing characters "RUSH" suggestive of an advantageous state for the player) corresponding to establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved stored information). The number may be displayed to increase (or may be displayed to decrease). In addition, the number of predetermined character images (for example, special character images that are not displayed in other effects) is increased (or decreased) according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase of the second reserved memory information). There may be. Further, according to the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second reserved stored information), a numerical image may be displayed that counts down from the upper limit value (4) of the number of second reserved stored information. A numerical image that counts up from the number of information (for example, 0) to the upper limit (4) may be displayed. In this way, the specific effect may be any effect mode.

(22) As the change effect, any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect in accordance with the increase in the number of second reserved storage information. For example, any effect may be used as long as the change of the effect mode in the various effects described above is executed according to the increase in the number of second reserved storage information.

(23) The change effect is to change the effect mode to increase the number of reach lines according to the number of second reserved storage information, but the reach symbol is a reach symbol using a symbol other than the "7" symbol. There may be. Such ready-to-win symbols include symbols other than those included in the symbol row used for normal variable display, such as special symbols such as "RUSH", which is associated with an advantageous state for the player. A pattern may be used.

(24) In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine is described in which game media are paid out to the player when a prize is won. It is also possible to employ an enclosed game machine in which game points (scores) are added without paying out to the player. The enclosed type game machine is formed with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which are an example of game media, within the game machine, and is also provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of winning. A gaming machine that pays out game media to the player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of a prize has been described, but the game medium is enclosed, and a game point ( A sealed game machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed type game machine is formed with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which are an example of game media, within the game machine, and is also provided with a storage unit for storing game points. The game points are added to the storage unit accordingly, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of winning.

(25) In the present embodiment, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" is exemplified, but the "ratio (ratio, probability)" is not limited to this. Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, or a value excluding 0% and 100% may be used.

(26) The game states advantageous to the player are the jackpot game state, time-saving state, high-base state, and a state in which the game state after the jackpot game has a higher probability of being determined to be a jackpot compared to the normal state. Any game state may be used as long as it is a game state more advantageous than the normal state for the player, such as a variable probability state.

(27) In the operation performance described above, the tilting direction sensor unit 123 capable of detecting the operation of an operation means operable by the player such as the stick controller 122 is used as a detection means capable of detecting the operation (movement) of the player. Such detection means is shown as an example. However, it is not limited to this, and other detection means such as the push sensor 124 capable of detecting the operation of the push button 120 may be used as the detection means capable of detecting the action of the player. Detecting means capable of directly detecting the action of the player, such as an infrared sensor, a motion sensor, or the like, may be used instead of the means for detecting the movement of the player.

(28) It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

8a first special symbol display device, 8b second special symbol display device, 1 pachinko game machine, 560
Game control microcomputer, 55 RAM, 9 effect display device, 96 time reduction remaining number image.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to a small winning state after executing variable display on the first variable display means and the second variable display means,
In the small win state, the game medium enters the specific area, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
The game is better when controlled to the small winning state based on the variable display on the second variable display means than when controlled to the small winning state based on the variable display on the first variable display means. It is likely to be advantageous for those who
The small win state controlled based on the variable display on the second variable display means includes a first small win state and a second small win state more advantageous to the player than the first small win state. ,
variable means for changing from a closed state to an open state in which game media can enter more easily than in the closed state, based on the display result of the variable display of normal symbols reaching a predetermined result;
By entering the game medium into the variable means, the variable display of the second variable display means is executed,
can be controlled to a special state in which the variable means is more likely to be in the open state than in a normal state;
further comprising special state termination means capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times variable display is performed in the special state;
the normal state is more disadvantageous to the player than the special state;
After the special state ends, transition to the normal state,
The special state termination means is
updating the number of times of variable display by the second variable display means in the special state, and ending the special state when the number of times of variable display by the second variable display means in the special state reaches a first number; is possible and
The number of times of the small winning state based on the variable display on the second variable display means in the special state is updated, and the number of times of the small winning state based on the variable display on the first variable display means in the special state is not updated. , when the number of times of the small hit state based on the variable display on the second variable display means reaches a second number, it is possible to end the special state;
updating the total number of variable display times of the first variable display means and the second variable display means in the special state, and the total number of variable display times of the first variable display means and the second variable display means in the special state; is a third number of times greater than the first number of times, it is possible to end the special state,
When the first variable display of the special state is the variable display on the second variable display means, or when the first variable display of the special state is the variable display on the first variable display means. A gaming machine characterized in that, even in the case of the variable display, light-emitting means provided in the variable means is caused to emit light during the period of the variable display .

Images